Home

HP LaserJet 4200/4300 Software Technical Reference

1. 83 LII tI X DL rca nrc I LEAF 83 Orientations EPIS 84 Door 84 Driver extensions ue meti esed 84 Configure tab features i ccc nerd utet ve sided ie dii dan ee eb Fe ERR ERR 85 Printer Model group a 85 Paper handling OptlonS E EERE A EEE 86 DUPISXING UNIT i 86 Mopiere ablod ERE 87 Envelope feeder Ee AAA E A ea ve cede 87 2 87 Optional paper SOUFIceS 2 e ioi ote 87 Otheroptioris uta 87 SIOL ages tu too oa eei MEE A 88 Printer MOiTIOIy ic itte c RE ERR RR ERE HU DONE EORR ERU KR E EUH FRAU DONE EE dauid 88 Allow scaling from large 88 Include types in application source 1 nnn 88 antt 89 Ignore Application trn 90 A
2. 56 Quick MISI 57 57 58 Custom Quick Sets 59 8 elio RM 59 Print on Both Sides b e Rae eR XXe EA ER 59 Flip Pages o 59 Booklet Printing Ecc 59 Activating booklet Printing 60 Selecting a Booklet COVEN 61 Pages per Slieet iicet eis detto bate urea Cc anb d Fue i 62 Software Technical Reference Print Qualitys sed te 63 Pru EIL EM 63 Output Settings group bOx ssssssssssssssese eene nr teen 63 attin C 64 Scale Patterns WYSIWYG de aa e Prec ted RES 64 Puntal Terras Black e e eet A at 64 Font Settings group DOXi iae etie eee use gusce quet paed addaa tni 64 EconoMOde i eo Re reb uenit i nei 64 Effectstab Teao e EB BH te ei es 65 Print Document On trn nsns 65 Scale Option eed eee a ade aoe aie eee e
3. 47 Installer Teatules 48 e Leere as 49 Printer Oliver E bieae 49 PCL 5e PCL 5 and PS drivers iei td eer cra rh ciae a teg Ce aa va a E ER EN CR XR an aud 49 Windows 95 98 Me NT 4 0 2000 and XP driver 49 Macintosh and Macintosh compatible system driver 49 Additional driver availability esses nennen nennen nnne 50 Macintosh compone e 50 Additional productivity 50 HP Web Registrati 50 Optional SofIW are i 50 FIP Web deta im 50 3 Driver features eee terre 53 PCL 5e PCL 6 driver features for Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me and Windows NT 4 0 53 Help jc M c 53 What s ths alo 53 Context sensitive Help tierna rt 53 Constraint 0 1 nre nitas nennt 53 BUDDIG IG e 54 Finishing Brent 56 Document preview A0
4. ona im t a em ie D 104 EconoMOode eee be eso ete eee te ie os b D Mete 104 Finishing tab feat res 5 cedit Pe ERE e PERRO E Fe 105 Pages pet Sh68Lt uie et ete Do e do cest E Dada aie nine 106 Print Page Borders eere iR eee enne e RR ee e ANAE 107 Order x atu justice avete nt bites tite 107 Booklet n aen aeri E 107 Rotate by 180 108 Stapling OPIO NSi o renes tti retra Shee e Up d cci tct aero 108 Stapling a 0 100 esent nen 108 Effects tab features aceri cec Cree ne dein Le Loo dad db nad 108 Print Document On Seting au 109 Scale to Fit iiec ame rei get e atii ede iot t Ee tst 109 96 of Normal Size Eaa Sanaa E Ek 109 110 Current 111 Watermark Message a ro REPREHEN eg deen CERE Re OUR Se ae eee 112 Message Angle 1e ce aee e Lees vated depen We vei E e Lo dnte ins 112 Font Attributes 112 METUIT 112 COlO
5. 111 Destination tab features 113 Job Storage Settings WINGOW 0 1 12 2 nnne nen 114 AbOUttaD 25er tne t atu leant ze ee 118 Device Settirigs t b niece nii pe ted 119 Choose Setup Language dialog 142 Set p dialog D03 s 5 5 ted Roe an idus 143 Welcome dialog 144 HP Software License Agreement dialog box seen 145 Web Update dialog rito iie e Pee tee e rebel eso rana 146 Type of Connection dialog 147 Select Portdialog ned te ete ea eur ted disse Rae 148 Network Setup dialog box sssssssssssssseseseeeenen enne eene eren nennen nnns 149 Network Printer Configuration dialog box 150 Identify Printer dialog box 1 151 Identify Printer dialog box 2 0 151 Specify Network Path dialog box ssssssssessssseseeeee eene nennen nna 152 Set Network Communication Mode dialog 22 2 4 153 Printer Model dialog box dialog 154 Installation Type dialog 155 Printer Name dialog DOK an iire e
6. 26 HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 printing system release 27 Bidirectional COMMUNICATION emunt eae dus 27 Bidirectional interface and connectivity nennen nnne 28 Driver Autoconfiguration ssssssssssssssssessseeeennee nennen nennen nenne nen 29 Web ACCOSS E 30 4 ES 30 EE CE 31 Configuration Information 32 Links to off printer SOlULIORS E ua 32 fear 32 Remote printer configuration ns 33 Networking 2 restitue tite temen Ra ira 34 COMO ALO Mss oxi 34 SECUN cee ee 34 DIA QMOSUCS 35 yw eren 35 Configurable e mail alerts 36 Printer Status 37 Remote firmware update 41 Determining the current level 1 41 Downloading the new firmware from the HP Web 2 000 41 Downloading the
7. 76 fee rA m DA EINE 76 76 desea ee ee a eee ala el ee til dae eel 77 Destination tab features 12100000 77 Destination Features tem eee de e Pedes 78 Hardware configuration and availability of Job Storage 78 Configuring the printer driver for a printer hard disk 78 Job Storage mod6as 2 fec t eat tes d to A do testet 79 MIU UEM ILE 79 eese 79 aieo 79 Using a PIN for Private Job and Stored 2 2222 79 Privat JOD EE 79 Stored EE 80 Document identifiers used in Job 80 Software Technical Reference 5 SANET E RET IEEE 80 ut tate antium 80 Using Job Storage options when 0 nns 81 Releasing stored jobs at the eene nnn 81 Deleting a Print etr eec teo rcov ea tbt ede 81 Output Dir options ine t ee pl eet e edite epo 81 SJolifeJe ep LET 82 Prntertiridge t utt ntt e 82
8. 199 Driver INF file 44 4 444 1 11 10 nnne enean nan nennen innen nennen 199 Adding bidirectional communication component 200 Adding mini installer 201 Disabling Enterprise 0 0 00 202 PEE 203 Fapor sources and destiriatlOns 203 Paper tray enne EE SEERE E E a 204 8 2 222 222 erin adine anian aK 204 Media ty POS and 204 PCL 5e and PCL 6 custom paper SIZES 000 000 0 nennen ner entren nennen 207 Paper Type comimiands c cedes certe nea e HR RAE TEE Re ERE SE ska Ra Ed eua EE R RR T T ER RENE 207 Network administrator software 208 Novell NetWare Internal rtr ttt tt tte tut ntt et e eie 208 Determining the server connection bindery versus NDS 208 Installing the Novell Client bindery and NDS Default 208 Setting up an NDS installed client to operate in bindery emulation mode Internal 209 Usi
9. _ _ PostScript EPS Archiveformat 0 X Jx Xx Jj TrueType font download option Outines X AAA X Ix x Bitmap Jo a 1 Native TrueType 1 X Sx XT jJ 136 Driver features Software Technical Reference Installing Windows printing system components Introduction The information that follows addresses the following topics Supported operating systems System requirements Font support General Windows installation instructions Detailed Windows installation instructions Setting a default printer Supported operating systems The HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printing system software supports the following operating systems Note Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows operating systemsprinter support for Windows 3 1xprinterssupport for Windows 3 1xThe HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers have not been tested with and do not support Windows 3 1x System requirements Following are the system requirements for installing and using the HP LaserJet printing system software on each of the supported operating systems Pentium R processor Minimum 16 color grayscale display with 640 by 480 pixel resolution video graphics array VGA Same amount of RAM as the minimum requirements for the operating system 93 MB of available disk space for full installation
10. 97 Gontext sensitive Elelp nr ect tide eed Ee peine edet edant ique Een 98 Constraint messages e e HE cni petu re Mr ito eee onere 98 layout tab iti eiit E tee etes RE rta 98 99 Software Technical Reference Printiol Both Sides ani A TP EE 99 Order 100 Advanced TeatUr8s RV Cau SO 100 leer p 100 Copy Count and Collated is 2 net ete terere ie e tele v rp bietet 100 RED uestem innen aei ete t deed c Este bentes 101 Send TrueType as Bitmaps ssisssssssssssssssseeeenn nennen nennen enn tenn 101 Graphics Mode for PCL 5 101 Paper Quality tab nennen nennen nene nn 102 Paper ODUOMS 5 5 102 First Page and Other enne stent 102 srieqenuj n H 103 SOUICOUS M 103 MH ite 103
11. H 112 Slarte opm T c aa oad tee 112 Ar m A eM IAM Md 113 Br 113 Destination tab 113 Destination features eiii ede dad ci a une da d 113 About peat e Dee eee Lect e bg eese eet eet et 118 E T Too 119 Input Paper Handling nnne nre 119 Accessory Output BiN e eM e dt o er te ee enu ka ena 119 Duplex Unit for 2 Sided Printing nennen 120 Printer Hard 120 Mopier Enabled ee ero ieee eee RR REEL Vena 120 Mopier mode and 120 Job Storage id deed ee take 120 Printer Memory dete tete eee eta ter tee tem 120 Forrri to Tray Assigriment cioe atc tenaci edt span die diei 121 Software Technical Reference 7 HP LaserJet 4200 4300 software 121 Incbox TNS AY OU eee I nrc ee ti 121 HP LaserJet software CD ROM Windows partition 121 HP LaserJet software CD ROM Macintosh 121 Availability and ei NR teu e rb tah Ere dtt eae 122 ln box CD ROM cS 122
12. EE 134 PostScript Specife 2 5 135 4 Installing Windows printing system components e 137 Supported operating 137 System 4 00 Ansset unAn eee ease 137 Font Dm 138 Basic 138 BIN geri 138 Installation Instr ctlOris 2 2 eere pri tegere pe e a P QR ERES te raga R RUNE EXE e e DER AR Nee SE Perte pel 141 General installation for Windows 95 98 Me NT 4 0 2000 141 Installing from the printing system nnne ennemis nnns 142 Installing from a network or from downloaded 142 Detailed Windows 142 Typical Installation dialog box nnns 142 CUSTOM 159 Product registration HP WebReg 161 Customization Utility for nnns 167 Silent WASTAN 168 Customized silent 168 Software Technical Reference D
13. Figure 29 Driver NT Forms tab Use the NT Forms tab to specify which media sizes and types are loaded in each of the available paper trays This constrains the choices available in the Size and Type lists on the Paper tab This constraint prevents information overload if you request unavailable sizes or types Available Trays is a drop down menu that contains all the printer trays that are specified on the Configure tab The This Tray Contains Size Forms drop down menu contains a list of standard paper sizes the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers support as well as any custom forms that are defined in the Forms tab The This Tray Contains Type drop down menu lists all of the media types supported by the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers The Clear All button removes all the size and type constraints on the Paper tab Configuring the trays 1 Select the appropriate tray from the Available Trays list 2 Use the This Tray Contains Size Forms drop down menu to select the paper size or form that is loaded in that tray 3 Use the This Tray Contains Type drop down menu to select the paper type that is configured for the tray 4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 for the remaining trays Software Technical Reference Driver features 91 5 If necessary click the Clear All button to reconfigure all the trays and remove the size and type constraints that have been imposed on the Paper tab PS driver features for Windows
14. Software Technical Reference Engineering Detail 219 Figure 99 NetWare dialog box queues serviced Click Change The Queues dialog box appears as shown in the following illustration Figure 100 Queues dialog box Available Queues Click Create The Create Queue dialog box appears as shown in the following illustration Create Queue TEST QUEUE 220 Engineering Detail Software Technical Reference Figure 101 Create Queue dialog box Type the queue name that you have chosen in the Queue Name field Use the File Server drop down menu to select the Novell server you want to use and then click OK The next NetWare window shows the server you selected and the printer queue on the right side see the following illustration Click Next Software Technical Reference Engineering Detail 221 Figure 102 NetWare dialog box displaying queues serviced In the dialog box that appears see the following illustration type the TCP IP information for the Jetdirect card server BLEU a C Automatically obtain TCPAP configuration from the DHCP server Automatically obtain TCPAP configuration from the BOOTP server LEE TELLE TCPAP Address po 8 pox px Subnet Mask 0 Nix Default Gateway Bx Bx TCPAP Ide Timeout seconde 120 Figure 103 TCP IP dialog bo
15. 245 Index Software Technical Reference 11 12 List of tables Table 1 Features of the HP LaserJet 4200 and the HP LaserJet 4300 series printers 20 Table 2 Bidirectional communication support in various operating systems 27 Table 3 Driver UI controls set by bidirectional 28 Table 4 Default alerts selection state for connection 2 40 Table 5 Update 4224 01 ara E enn errans nnne nnn 45 Table 6 Troubleshooting a firmware update 45 Table 7 Troubleshooting a firmware update 45 Table 8 Bubble help 0 1 2 22 2222 54 Table 9 Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers 57 Table Page orlentati n c itii reete R e Unt IE doo 59 Table 11 EconoMode Settings sssssssssssssssssssseses 64 Table 12 Name drop down menu text strings 0 1 74 Table 13 Custom width and height limits for the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers 75 Table 14 Close dialog box text strings
16. M Output Bin Options Bin Automatically Select OK Cancel 0010 Figure 44 Destination tab features Destination features Hardware configuration and availability of Job Storage options The HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers can be equipped with a hard disk to accommodate the following Job Storage options e Proof and Hold e Private Job e Quick Software Technical Reference Driver features 113 e Stored Job The following illustration shows the Job Storage Settings window Job Storage Settings 2x Your job will be printed but not stored on the printer Job Storage Mode amp Off Proof and Hold C Private Job Quick Copy Stored Job Require PIN to Print Job Identification User Name fi ERRY Job Name UNTITLED 0000 079 cw Figure 45 Job Storage Settings window Cancel The Job Storage options available to you depends on whether your printer has an optional hard disk installed Job Storage options require a printer hard disk an optional HP EIO disk drive The Quick Copy and Stored Job options require the installation of a printer hard disk To use all four of the Job Storage options the printer must have the optional hard disk installed the Printer Hard Disk setting under Installable Options in the Device Settings tab must be Installed and the print driver must be configured t
17. 2222 2 5 croc 123 Software component 2 1 1 00 124 Software component 2 110000 eene 125 Driver support tables for the HP LaserJet 4200 4300 series printers 127 Job stream dee ea cette 127 Stream 127 GCONMOCTIVILY see Em 127 Bidirectional 127 Driver Management and Configuration utility essen 128 EE 128 128 Constraint Support 129 Document layo t lt edness 129 JOD SIOA GO 130 Custom preference storage recall sse ener 130 PHU COMI OIS C 130 Wae MAIRS 132 PAD GW E 132 legium S 133 ie Eoo 133 Alternate Source paper type e bet a ee rd be cba ER ERE Ren as 134 PRINTING destinat D 134 installable optionS 134 gt
18. sssssssssssssssssseseeeeneneenere nennen nnns nnne nnn nen 76 Table 15 Printer behavior with Ignore Application Collation settings 90 Table 16 EconoMode Settings ssssssssssssssssseeeeeeeeenn nennen nennen nnns 104 Table 17 Driver Mopier mode and collation 120 Table 18 CD ROM 122 Table 19 Software component availability for HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers 124 Table 20 Software component localization for the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers 125 Table 21 Driver support for job stream output feature 127 Table 22 Driver support for stream output modes feature 127 Table 23 Driver support for connectivity 127 Table 24 Driver support for bidirectional communication features 127 Table 25 Driver support for DMC utility feature nnne 128 Table 26 Driver support for Ul features sess n nennen nennen nnns 128 Table 27 Driver support for Help 128 Table 28 Driver support for 129 Table 29 Driver support for document layout featur
19. To enable Driver Management and Configuration follow these steps during installation 1 Inthe software CD ROM browser screen click Customization Utility In the Choose Setup Language dialog box select the language of your choice and then click OK In the Option dialog box click the Create Customized Installer option button and then click Next In the Installer Type dialog box click Silent Installer afr Ww I In the Language and Operating System s dialog box select the language and operating systems of your choice and then click Next In the Printer Model s dialog box select the printer model s to include and then click Next In the Components dialog box select the components you want to install and then click Next In the Port dialog box select the printer port and then click Next ON OD In the Driver Configuration dialog box select the Yes allow me to configure the drivers option button and then click Next to proceed with the rest of the installation Enterprise AutoConfiguration Internal Enterprise AutoConfiguration EAC makes it possible for a printer driver that is installed using the Add Printer Wizard or Point and Print to take advantage of HP s bidirectional communication software and AutoConfiguration functionality The printer driver can therefore be configured with the same settings as the physical configuration of the printer Table 87 Drivers that support Enterprise AutoConfiguration
20. Pages Up 11 by 8 5 2 Letter Left Binding v Rages Pel Sheet Pint Page Borders Page WdE Right then Down Figure 14 Selecting booklet printing type The appearance of the screen might vary from product to product Print Quality settings for example can be 600 dpi or Faster Printing or Default Selecting a booklet cover The booklet cover must be the same size as the inside sheets Click File click Print and then click Properties Click the Paper tab and then select the Use different paper for first page check box Click the First Page tab On the Size is Source is and Type is menus select the size source and type settings for your cover Click the Other Pages tab On the Size is and Source is menus select the size and source settings for the inside sheets of your print job Click the Back Cover tab The back cover if there is one must be the same size as the booklet cover and the inside sheets The No back cover is the default setting If your print job has a back cover that uses the same Source and type settings you selected in the First Page tab select Use the first page source If not select Use an alternate source and then select the back cover settings in the Source is and Type is menus Software Technical Reference Driver features 61 Pages per Sheet 62 The Pages per Sheet drop down menu provides six settings 1 default 2 4 6 9 and 16 If
21. ll Table 29 Driver support for document layout features Windows XP 64 amp 32 Windows Windows NT 4 0 Windows 95 98 M 2000 Manual duplex NE UNI Flip pages up Pagers per sheet N up Page borders on off KC WEE PR OOo _ x x x x x Booklet printing X Jx x x X f order order Xo XxX NEM on both X sides Fold saddle stitch Print document E H XM X X on alternative size Scaletofit i scaling from large paper tofmmmasge X x x x 1E E X X Landscape X X X X X x x Rotated by 180 al i Number of copies Ignore application collation X X XIX x xX x x Software Technical Reference Driver features 129 Job storage Table 30 Driver support for job storage features Windows XP 64 amp 32 Windows Windows NT 4 0 Windows 95 98 2000 CL6 CL5 PCLS PS Proof and hold Private job Quick copy Storedjob X X X gt lt gt lt gt lt X x Username X x pM PIN 1 Unicode for job X X X X and user name and user nam MEINEN NN and user name Custom preference storage recall gt lt gt lt X i Table 31 Driver support for custom preference storage recall f
22. Help OK Cancel ool Figure 39 Finishing tab with duplexing unit and paper handling accessory The Finishing tab can contain the following controls e Pages per Sheet e Print Page Borders activated when Pages per Sheet setting is greater than 1 Order activated when the Pages per Sheetsetting is greater than 1 e Booklet Layout visible when the Duplex Unit for 2 Sided Printing setting on the Device Settings tab is Installed e Rotate by 180 degrees e Stapling Options visible when the Accessory Output Bin setting on the Device Settings tab is HP 500 Sheet Stacker Stapler e Booklet Layout Pages per Sheet 106 The Pages per Sheet option also called n Up is a drop down list with six settings 1 default 2 4 6 9 and 16 Related controls indented beneath the Pages per Sheet edit box are Print Page Borders and Page Order which become active when the Pages Per Sheet setting is greater than 1 If you type another value into the box for example 3 the control will round the value entered to the nearest valid value in this example 4 Driver features Software Technical Reference When the Print Page Borders check box is selected line is set around each page image to help visually define the borders of each logical page Print Page Borders When you select the Print Page Borders check box a line is set around each page image on a printed sheet to help visually define
23. x lt X REC 1 E qo pp NEN LIL LE IL HE TII Software Technical Reference Driver features Watermarks PS eo o i o o gt z o gt o o gt er e T On gt lt o gt Table 33 Driver support for watermarks feature First page only X nam Watermark font X X Watermark font X X X Fn LEN RN Watermark font X X X prc pe cp Watermark font X X X Paper sizes X Watermark font X X X name Watermark X angle watermark definition o o E o 2 o o 2 e 2 50 eo ME o gt gt 2 o gt 52 E gt o e N o gt gt er e e n gt lt o gt Executive JIS Double Postcard JIS Envelope size definition Executive ae sine a Software Technical Reference Driver features 132 Paper types Table 35 Driver support for paper types Windows XP 64 amp 32 Windows Windows NT 4 0 Windows 95 98 Me 2000 Pos PS POL PS PS PS Unsped ed xX X X Pan x Tx X letterhead X Transparency X x Prepuhed X X laes xX Xx B
24. EAC loads and uses the bidirectional communication component that is included with the driver only long enough to retrieve the device configuration and then closes the bidirectional communication Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP requirements The driver entry point that is used to invoke normal autoconfiguration is DrvPrinterEvent EAC design requires that the driver call into a mini installer dynamic link library DLL to set up the bidirectional communication infrastructure that is 196 Engineering Detail Software Technical Reference needed for successful AutoConfiguration When the driver has completed its existing AutoConfiguration step it is required to call back into the mini installer to clean up The mini installer uses a file with an extension to drive the process of installing and running the bidirectional communication component Driver INF file requirements The changes required to make EAC work are of two kinds e adding bidirectional communication component files e adding mini installer files Adding bidirectional communication component files The bidirectional communication component that is installed during Enterprise AutoConfiguration resides in and runs from the driver directory 12 or 3 depending on the driver version type This is in contrast to the bidirectional communication component that is installed using the HP Installer which resides in the System32 directory The driver directory i
25. KeyName jValues ften 275 When the Status check rate slider control is set to the LessOften print jobs will use the value for this key to check the status of a print job Update job state every 275 milliseconds 3 10 of second LessOftenPlusOne 275 When the Status check rate slider control is set to the LessOftenPlusOne print jobs will use the value for this key to check the status of a print job Update job state every 275 milliseconds 3 10 of second 275 When the Status check rate slider control is set to the Middle print jobs will LessO Middle use the value for this key to check the status of a print job Update job state every 275 milliseconds 3 10 of second MoreOftenLessOne 275 When the Status check rate slider control is set to the MoreOftenLessOne print jobs will use the value for this key to check the status of a print job Update job state every 275 milliseconds 3 10 of second MoreOften 275 When the Status check rate slider control is set to the MoreOften print jobs will use the value for this key to check the status of a print job Update job state every 275 milliseconds 3 10 of second 1All values are default values Because Windows spooler DS rates do not cause any network traffic the values do not vary PrinterAlertRates This section contains key and value pairs that control the update interval that Printer Status and Alerts uses to query for the state of a direct c
26. From the Networking tab you can enable and configure the following network protocols e TCP IP e IPX SPX e AppleTalk e Data Link Control Logical Link Control DLC LLC e Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP Software Technical Reference Software description Configurable e mail alerts The printer can automatically send e mail alerts about printer problems or job status to specified e mail addresses For example if toner is low the printer can notify the person responsible for ordering or changing the cartridge If there is a printer failure an e mail alert can be sent directly to the person responsible for fixing the problem These e mail alerts can be configured to be sent to any device that can accept e mail such as digital phones pagers and personal digital assistants In large environments administrators can route e mail addresses to list servers or universal resource locator addresses URLs for expanded notification hp LaserJet 4200 63 230 114 161 hp LaserJet 4200 Notification Distribution Lists Address1 or URL Address2 amp oompany com or URL Gonfigure Email Settings Set Security Other Links Dp stent suppnrt Order Supplies Product Support Events Address1 Address2 Supplies L1 Service Media Path o 0 Advisory o Cancel Apply Figure 5 Configurable Alerts page 36 Software description Software Technical
27. Symbol The Macintosh printing system also includes the HP 45 XPS font families Clarendon Condensed Bold Symbol Albertus Medium Coronet Times New Roman Antique Olive Courier Univers Arial Garamond Univers Condensed CG Omega Letter Gothic Wingdings CG Times Marigold The following bitmap screen fonts reside on the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book Helvetica Palatino Software Technical Reference Installation for Macintosh IBM OS 2 and Linux operating systems 175 176 ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book Oblique Helvetica Bold Palatino Bold ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi Helvetica Bold Oblique Palatino Bold Italic ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi Oblique Helvetica Oblique Palatino Italic ITC Bookman Demi Helvetica Narrow Symbol ITC Bookman Demi Italic Helvetica Narrow Bold Times Bold ITC Bookman Light Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique Times Bold Italic ITC Bookman Light Italic Helvetica Narrow Oblique Times Italic Courier New Century Schoolbook Bold Times Roman Courier Bold New Century Schoolbook Bold Italic ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic Courier Bold Oblique New Century Schoolbook Italic ITC Zapf Dingbats Courier Oblique New Century Schoolbook Roman The following fonts are resident on all HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers but can be used by Macintosh platforms only if you install additional screen fonts You can either use these screen fonts
28. Table 8 Bubble help messages Condition Etfet Message Finishing tab Pages per Sheet Finishing tab Booklet Printing To use this feature set Pages per greater than 1 is not available if Print on Both Sheet to 1 Sides check box is selected 54 Driver features Software Technical Reference Condition _ Finishing tab Pages per ee eee is Effects tab Print Document aise ESE To use this feature set Pages per Finishing tab Pages per Sheet is Effects tab of Normal Size is To use this feature set Pages per Finishing tab Booklet Printing Finishing tab Pages per Sheet To use this feature set the Finishing tab Booklet Printing Effects tab Print Document use this feature set the Finishing tab Booklet Printing Effects tab of Normal Size is To use this feature set the setting is any setting except Off not available Effects tab The Print Document Effects tab of Normal Size is To use this feature turn off the Effects tab The Print Document Paper tab A Help bubble points Although your document will be On check box is selected to Size Is formatted for the paper size indicated it will be printed on the paper size specified on the Effects tab Effects tab The Print Document Finishing tab Pages per Sheet To use this feature turn off the Effects tab The of Normal Effects tab Print Document To use this feature set of Size setting
29. ucc Porat di 4 N Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows Me 5 Windows NT 4 0 only User s Manual The User s Manual setting provides a Quick Set for optimal printing of the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 User s Guide 58 Driver features Software Technical Reference Custom Quick Sets Untitled When you change any of the default settings on the Finishing tab or any of the other tabs the name in the Quick Set drop down menu dynamically changes to Untitled If you want to save this configuration as a Quick Set highlight the word Untitled type the name you want for your new Quick Set and click Save Quick sets are saved in the system registry To delete a Quick Set select it from the drop down menu and click Delete You can store a maximum of 25 user defined Quick Sets on a particular system If you attempt to save too many a message box appears that reads There are too many Quick Sets defined Please delete some before adding new ones Document Options Print on Both Sides option The default setting for the Print on Both Sides option is OFF not selected Print on Both Sides is not available when e is on the Paper tabis set to Transparency Cardstock or Labels e is is anything except Letter Legal 4 5 B4 B5 Japanese Industry Standard or JIS Executive 11 x 17 or custom sizes greater than or equal to 148 mm by 210 mm 5 8 inches b
30. Plain has 5 letters plus 1 for a total of 6 For the command to work properly at least one of the paper trays in the printer must be configured at the control panel for the paper type used in the command Note Some paper type options listed in the following table might not be defined in the printer driver Table 95 Paper type commands Paper type Cardstock Letterhead Software Technical Reference Engineering Detail 207 Esc Wd O Wi Pan 7 T Wd Wd Wd Rough SSS 13 Wd Transparency 0020 Wi Envelope 2 1 The correct command for cardstock is Esc amp n11WdCard Stock with a space between the d and the S and with an uppercase S You must spell out the word Transparency in the string although it is abbreviated on the printer control panel Network administrator software Internal Novell NetWare Internal This section provides important information about the Novell NetWare environment It addresses the following topics e Determining the server connection bindery versus NetWare Directory Service NDS e Installing the Novell Client bindery and NDS Default e Using Jet Admin 3 4 4 2 to build Novell queues e Removing printer objects from the Novell server e Installing Novell Directory Printing Services NDPS printer agents e Making printer agents e ZENworks 2 0 e Troubleshooting notes problem
31. HH 3 B PCL 5c 9x 4 0 X 2000 Notes Common 9x 4 0 X x x x x X X X x X X x Windows 2000 Installer X X Table 20 Software component localization for the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers Component Operating FR IT JN TC SC TH SW FN CZ TU System Printer Status 9x 4 0 x X X x X X X X X X x X X X X X X X x x and Alerts 2000 XP Macintosh Mac X PS PPD Utility 17 Macintosh EBESSHEERN X Installation Notes PCL 6 9x 4 0 X e X x 2000 XP Printing 9x 4 0 X X X X X X X X X B X X ReadMe Printing 9x 4 0 System 2000 XP Release Notes Late breaking ReadMe Web 4 0 2000 Fi a a a X X JetAdmin UNIX Help Software Technical Reference Driver features 125 d Component Operating TC SC TH Online E a dpt manuals 2000 XP PDF IBM OS 2 OS 2 X x x x x Driver PCL 5c IBM E B X BB E Standard 9x 4 0 EET pum PS 3 Fonts 9x 4 0 x X x x x Xx x x x x x x x x x x x x OUS oe LLL LL LL LL 1For the Windows NT 4 0 operating system the English driver is used The English driver is used Language Key AR Arabic CZ Czech DN Danish DU Dutch EN English FN Finnish FR French GE German HE Hebrew HU Hungarian IT Italian
32. Output Bin Options The Output Bin Options group box contains a drop down menu that lets you select from a list of configured output bins Only output bins configured on the Device Settings tab appear in this drop down menu Automatically Select This is the default setting Stacker Bin The optional 500 Sheet Stacker is a single 500 sheet stacking device that accommodates up to 500 sheets of standard and custom sized paper Stacker Bin Stapled The optional 500 Sheet Stapler Stacker is a single 500 sheet stapling and stacking device that accommodates up to 500 sheets of standard and custom sized paper The print job is directed to the output paper handling device and receives a single staple It provides stapling for up to 15 sheets of Letter Legal or A4 paper per document Top Bin The HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers have an output bin that can be selected in the driver Output is delivered face down The rear face up bin also can be manually set for a straight paper path Use the rear output door straight through paper path when printing envelopes labels heavy or light weight paper and other thick or special print media Remove each sheet as it exits the printer Software Technical Reference Driver features 117 About tab The About tab provides detailed information about the driver It contains an overall build number in parenthesis after the model name along with specific information about each of the components T
33. PCL 6 PCL 5e PS HP LaserJet 5100 Series PCL 6 PCL 5e PS 1The HP Color LaserJet 4500 drivers PCL 5 PCL 6 and PS are not supported in Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me However new PCL 5 and PCL 6 but not PS drivers for this printer that will support Printer Status and Alerts will be available soon Check the Web at URL http www hp com for the newest Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows Me PCL 5 and PCL 6 drivers This restriction does not affect the HP Color LaserJet 4550 drivers The original drivers released with the HP LaserJet 4000 series and HP LaserJet 5000 Series printers do not support Printer Status and Alerts Because those products were introduced the drivers have been updated The new drivers support Printer Status and Alerts 3The PCL 6 driver for the HP LaserJet 8000 is not supported in Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows Me original MS version of the HP Color LaserJet 8550 PS driver included on the CD that came with the product is not supported new version available at URL http www hp com is supported For an updated list of products that support the Printer Status and Alerts feature open the text file HPSASDRV MTX which is located in the Windows subdirectory Software Technical Reference Engineering Detail 233 Printer Status and Alerts INF file Internal This section presents the settings in the INF file for the standalone Printer Status and Alerts program The values are set b
34. Would you like Setup to check the Web for determines that an Internet connection might be available updated software Yes requires an active Internet If No is selected Next takes you to the connection option button Type of Connection dialog box This is the default option If Yes is selected clicking Next starts the Web Update Details of the Internet installation are not covered in this document Web Update requires Internet Explorer 4 0 or later Back returns you to the HP Software License Agreement dialog box Cancel takes you to the Exit Setup dialog box No option button 146 Installing Windows printing system components Software Technical Reference Type of Connection X Please select how your printer will be connected Connected to this computer e d parallel cable USB cable or e Connected to the network the printer is connected directly to the network or invent shared through another computer on the network EN Figure 53 Type of Connection dialog box Table 49 Type of Connection dialog box text strings Type of Connection Please select the way your printer will be If Connected to this computer a direct connected connection using a parallel cable Connected to this computer by parallel universal serial bus cable or infrared cable USB cable or IR option button connection is selected Next takes you to the Select Port dialog box This is the h k e g t
35. amp admin 1 dn admin 2 dh itest Bl BROKEN tiger Bl tiger 5XBH 4S Novell NetWare 5 Conn SCL 500 SNovell NetWare 5 01 Note Note DNLS LSP Del DPsS 5xB tiger KEN5xh Manager amp KEN5xbNDPS Figure 108 NetWare Administrator window NWAdmin32 3 Select all of the references to the printer you are working on either two or three objects are listed If the printer was set up in bindery mode only two objects are associated with the printer If the printer was set up in NDS mode three objects are associated with the printer With an NDS queue the printer server object normally has PO listed on the back of the name Right click the printer object and then click Details Click print layout non NDPS for the printer objects that are associated with the queue and their names see figure 89 This will sometimes help you to identify which objects are associated with each other Again with a bindery queue two objects are associated with an NDS queue three objects are associated Each object has its own icon Software Technical Reference Engineering Detail ER Print Server Non DPS 4050 228 Engineering Detail Software Technical Reference Software Technical Reference Figure 109 Print Layout of an NDS Queue In the following screen shot figure 90 the three objects associated with an NDS print queue are highlighted To build a new queue for
36. custom install Table 72 HP LaserJet Installer dialog text strings custom install Title of dialog box Text in dialog box User Options and Descriptions HP LaserJet Installer Custom Install drop down menu Select the install location using the Printer Descriptions Classic Select Folder option if the desired location is different from Macintosh hp LaserJet Utility Classic HD Installation Notes Classic Select available components to install hp LaserJet Help Classic by using the check boxes in the list USB Components Classic Click the Read Me button to open the hp Manual Duplex amp Booklet Classic Installer readme file Disk space available conditional Clicking Install starts the installation on Approximate disk space needed the selected disk conditional Click the Quit button to quit the The HP LaserJet Folder will be created on Installer without making any changes to the disk Macintosh HD the system Select Folder button Quit button Install button default option 182 Installation for Macintosh IBM OS 2 and Linux operating systems Software Technical Reference 5 Installing Items remaining to be installed 286 Installing HP LaserJet XXXX Series E This mstallatinn was created with Inztallee VSF fram MindViemn haare Figure 77 Installing dialog box Table 73 Installing dialog text strings itle of dialog box Text in dialog box User Options and Desc
37. step 4 should no longer appear in the Printer Status and Alerts application window If it does repeat steps 3 through 6 The name should not appear in Printer Status and Alerts a second time Removing support for a specific driver 1 Open a command prompt window 2 Change directories so that the current directory is the windows system directory For Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows Me operating systems it will typically be windows system for Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP systems it will be winnt system32 3 Make sure Printer Status and Alerts is closed If it is not right click the Printer Status and Alerts tray icon and click Exit Type the command hpbdrvhk r Name of the Printer Goes Here Repeat step 4 for each printer name that is to be removed Type the command hpstatus Any printer that references the same driver model will longer be supported by Printer Status and Alerts Driver Support Matrix HPSASDRV MTX The status component determines which printer drivers it supports by consulting a file called the Driver Support Matrix DSM which is named HPSASDRV MTX This DSM file is nothing more than an INI file that contains entries of driver model names that it specifically supports or specifically does not support DSM File Format The format of the DSM file looks like this Driver Model Name supported 0 1 Each driver model name that status supports will have an entry
38. where paper size depends on the paper size set on the Paper tab The following table shows the appropriate entries in the Booklet Printing drop down menu for each selected paper size Booklet printing is disabled when the following paper sizes are selected Executive A3 A5 B4 B5 and 11 by 17 and envelopes and postcards of any size Software Technical Reference Driver features 59 The Booklet Printing drop down menu appears only when e Print on Both Sides is selected e 9e of Normal Size on the Effects tab is 100 e Pages per Sheet is 1 e Print Document On on the Effects tab is not selected If any except the first of these conditions is not met a Bubble Help appears next to Booklet Printing to tell you why it is disabled Activating booklet printing Note The following instructions apply only to PCL drivers The PostScript PS driver supports booklet a printing through Windows programs that provide booklet printing configuration settings 1 Click File click Print and then click Properties hp LaserJet 4200 PCL 6 v Figure 13 Activating booklet printing 2 Click the Finishing tab On the drop down menu select Print on Both Sides 3 Inthe Booklet Printing drop down menu select the type of booklet printing that you want The booklet printing type consists of the media size and the location of the binding for example Letter Left binding 60 Driver features Software Technical Reference
39. 000 page print cartridge 4300 series 21 Speed Connectivity Paper handling Resolution and print cartridge 64 MB RAM expandable to 416 MB 4200 series 80 MB RAM expandable to 416 MB 4300 series 64 MB RAM expandable to 416 MB 4200 series 80 MB RAM expandable to 416 MB 4300 series 22 Parallel connection HP Jetdirect 10 100Base TX print server card for network connection e 35 ppm letter size media 34 ppm 4 size media 4200 series e 45 ppm letter size media 44 ppm A4 size media 4300 series Parallel connection HP Jetdirect 10 100Base TX print server card for network connection e 35 ppm letter size media 34 ppm A4 size media 4200 series e 45 ppm letter size media 44 ppm A4 size media 4300 series Purpose and scope one 100 sheet multipurpose tray tray 1 maximum paper size legal 216 mm by 356 mm 8 5 by 14 inches two 500 sheet trays trays 2 and 3 maximum paper size legal 216 mm by 356 mm 8 5 by 14 inches duplexing unit for automatic two sided printing 500 sheet stacker output accessory optional HCI 1 500 sheet tray one 100 sheet multipurpose tray tray 1 maximum paper size legal 216 mm by 356 mm 8 5 by 14 inches two 500 sheet trays trays 2 and 3 maximum paper size legal 216 mm by 356 mm 8 5 by 14 inches duplexing unit for automatic two sided print
40. 100 YS none Watermarks first page only Current watermarks none Confidential Draft SAMPLE Software Technical Reference Driver features 57 Driver feature Watermark message Watermark message angle Watermark message custom angle Watermark font name Watermark font color Watermark font shading Watermark font size Watermark font style Mini pages tab Use different paper for first page All pages and first page size is All pages and first page source is All pages and first page type is Other pages source is Other pages type is Back cover Back cover source is Back cover type is Custom width Custom paper size height Paper size units Destination features Job storage mode Job storage require PIN to print Job storage user name Job storage job name Job storage PIN to print Output bin Output bin option Copies Orientation Rotate by 180 degrees 1 PCL 5e only 2 Thai only 3 N Thai US English Quick Sets Other language default DMC Preconfigurable default values setting if different ms 5 Regular Off all pages use the same paper Letter N N Y Auto Select Y ed 1 1 he 216mm Unspecified 216 mm Off ____ m 1 r UNTITLED UNHLED Topbinfacedow
41. 47 Device Settings tab Each model of the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 printer device has its own list of configurable items refer to the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 User Guide for detailed information The description that follows includes installable options that may be supported by one or more printer models Input Paper Handling Options The Input Paper Handling Options include standard trays high capacity input trays configurable sized paper trays XY Trays and envelope feeders Generally items that are installed separately have a separate Installable Options entry For example for the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers trays 3 and 4 can be high capacity 1 500 sheet trays The additional input trays are included as paper sources in the driver s Paper Quality tab Another installable option is Envelope Feeder To install an envelope feeder select Installed in the Envelope Feeder drop down menu When installed the Envelope Feeder option will be enabled as a Paper Source setting on the Paper Quality tab Accessory Output Bin The Accessory Output Bin setting includes various output devices that may be added to one of the printer s standard output tray generally the face up tray Generally a printer supports only one output accessory For example the HP Software Technical Reference Driver features 119 LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers can support either the HP 500 Sheet Stacker or the HP 500 Sheet Stacker Stapler Dup
42. 8 5 by 11 inches me 7 5 First Page Figure 17 Effects tab Print Document On setting Use Print Document On to format the document for one paper size and then print the document on a different paper size with or without scaling the image to fit the new paper size The Print Document On control is disabled by either of the following conditions Percent of Normal Size is not 100 Pages per Sheet on the Finishing tab is not 1 When Print Document On is selected the drop down menu shows the media sizes on which you can print The list contains all the standard media sizes that are supported by the selected media source and any custom sizes that you have created if the currently selected media source is manual auto or any tray When Print Document On is selected Scale to Fit is automatically selected Software Technical Reference Driver features 65 Scale to Fit option The Scale to Fit option specifies whether each formatted document page image is scaled to fit the target paper size By default Scale to Fit is selected when Print Document On is selected If the setting is turned off then the document page images will not be scaled and are instead centered at full size on the target paper If the document size is larger than the target paper size then the document image is clipped If it is smaller then it is centered within the target paper The following illustration shows preview images for a document formatted for
43. Application Collation options in drivers 90 image of printer in drivers 69 Include types in application source list option in drivers 88 for Printer Status and Alerts 234 for Windows 95 98 and Me 199 for Windows NT 4 0 2000 and XP 197 HP Web Access 30 Input Paper Handling Options in drivers 119 input trays See trays Install Printer wizard 47 custom for Windows 159 driver only for Windows 169 silent for Windows 168 system requirements for Macintosh IBM OS 2 and Linux operating systems 173 System requirements for Windows operating systems 137 using Customization Utility for Windows 167 using Windows Point and Print 170 Macintosh operating systems 174 printing system software 26 availability by operating system 124 description 48 fonts 124 localization 125 online user guide 26 printer software for IBM OS 2 190 printer software for Macintosh 178 printer software for Windows 141 Printer Status and Alerts 243 Instant Support 32 Internet Printing Protocol IPP 34 IPP Internet Printing Protocol 34 IPX SPX 35 JetAdmin See HP JetAdmin job accounting information support 127 job properties changing in IBM operating systems 193 job status 39 Job Storage options in drivers 78 job storage support in drivers 130 Job Storage tab in drivers 94 job storage enabling in driver 88 job stream output support 127 job tracking temporarily disabling 238 250 deleting 117 enabling stored in driver 88 private 79 private 79 private 95 pri
44. For Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP administrator rights on the system are necessary to install the software When the HP LaserJet printing system installer runs the HP LaserJet uninstaller is always added to the system Software Technical Reference Installing Windows printing system components 141 Installing from the printing system CD ROM To install the HP LaserJet printing system from the CD ROM that came with your printer follow these instructions 1 Close all programs 2 Insert the CD ROM in the CD ROM drive Note If your CD ROM does not start automatically click Start click Run and then browse to and click the SETUP EXE file in the root location of the CD ROM 3 Click Install Printer and follow the onscreen prompts Installing from a network or from downloaded files Follow these instructions if you downloaded the files from the Web or if you are installing the printing system files from a network You might need to see your network administrator for the location of the printing system software file 1 Browse to the location of the SETUP EXE file 2 Double click the SETUP EXE file 3 Click Install Printer and continue to follow the instructions until the printer is installed For detailed installation instructions see Detailed Windows installation Detailed Windows installation This section provides information about the installation dialog box sequence for installing the HP LaserJet printing system softwar
45. JN Japanese KO Korean NW Norwegian PG Portuguese PO Polish RU Russian SC Simplified Chinese SW Swedish SP Spanish TC Traditional Chinese TH Thai TU Turkish 126 Driver features Software Technical Reference Driver support tables for the HP LaserJet 4200 4300 series printers The following tables detail the software features available for each driver type and for each supported operating system supported by the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers Job stream output Table 21 Driver support for job stream output feature PCL6 passthrough support XL 3 0 XL color PostScriptlevel 3 PostScript level 1 2 PRN file driver X X identification Job accounting X X X X X xX XxX X X information UTF 8 encoding X X X X X for PJL Stream output modes Table 22 Driver support for stream output modes feature Windows XP 64 amp 32 Windows 2000 Windows NT 4 0 Windows 95 98 Me Mac S2 i Poles Ps Pele 8 PCLA PCLs PS PS X X x X x x x _ X est oe ee Sle el Connectivity Table 23 Driver support for connectivity features Windows XP 64 amp 32 Windows 2000 Windows NT 4 0 Windows 95 98 Me Mac OS2 Pols Pos Ps Pce POLS PS PCL Peis PS PS PS Lus Bidirectional communication Table 24 Driver support for bidirectiona
46. Note If the printer is connected through a local port USB or parallel then the RFU file can be sent directly to the printer with a COPY command from a command prompt or MS DOS R window At the command prompt perform the following steps for your operating system From a command prompt or MS DOS window type the following command Mode Ipt1 p Then press ENTER on the keyboard If the printer is attached to a parallel port other than LPT1 then substitute the proper LPT port number in the Mode command The response you receive should be similar to these examples LPT1 Not Rerouted Infinite retry on parallel printer time out Windows 95 98 Me NT 4 0 2000 and XP 42 The RFU file can be sent directly to the printer with a COPY command from a command prompt or MS DOS window copy b FILENAME PORTNAME where FILENAME is the name of the RFU file and PORTNAME is the name of the appropriate printer port such as LPT 1 Software description Software Technical Reference Remote firmware update through a Windows network If the printer is shared on a Windows network then the following command can be issued from a command prompt or MS DOS window copy b FILENAME lt COMPUTERNAME gt lt SHARENAME gt where FILENAME is the name of the RFU file lt COMPUTERNAMESs is the name of the computer from which the printer is being shared and lt SHARENAMESs is the printer share name do not type the angle brackets The mes
47. Paper source commands PcL5e Pete PSs ad a ae eee Taya2 9 5 5 T ayash Emelpefeeder _ Je Jeo o o Media types and sizes The tables in this section provide information about media features media attributes and paper handling constraints for the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers 204 Engineering Detail Software Technical Reference Note The following table lists the features and attributes of various media listed under the Size Is drop down menu on the Paper tab The list order can vary depending on the printer and operating system The list contains all the following sizes and might contain sizes from other drivers Table 91 Supported features and attributes by driver Paper sizes Width PCL 5 PCL 6 PS commands margin x margin margins y portrait landscape Letter LETTER 150 100 120 100 100 Letter 100 v Ul 100 Executive JISEXEC W612h936 page _ ee A5 148 mm 25 A5 150 100 120 100 100 A5 5 83 100 inches A4 210 0 A4 142 118 100 100 4 8 27 100 100 inches Envelope 105 mm Commercial 4 12 10 150 120 100 100 10 100 100 10 inches Envelope DL ISO DE 142 118 104 100 EnvDL 100 100 C5 142 118 100 100 EnvC5 100 100 Envelope B5 ENV 142 118 100 100 EnvISOB B5 ISO 100 100 Envelope C5 ISO Envelope Mon
48. REFUND HP SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS The following License Terms govern your use of the accompanying Software unless you have separate written agreement with HP Do you accept the terms of the preceding license agreement If so click Yes If you select No Setup will close lt Back Yes No Figure 51 HP Software License Agreement dialog box Table 47 HP Software License Agreement dialog box text strings Title of dialog box Text in dialog box User options and descriptions HP Software License Agreement Please read the following license Yes takes you to the Web Update agreement Use the scroll bar to dialog box view the entire agreement Back returns you to the Welcome Do you accept the terms of the dialog box preceding license agreement If so No takes vou fo the Exit Setu click Yes If you click No Setup will dialog close Software Technical Reference Installing Windows printing system components 145 Web Update Setup can look for updated software at the Hewlett Packard Web site 2 Would you like Setup to check the web for updated software invent Yes requires an active Internet connection No Back Cancel Figure 52 Web Update dialog box Table 48 Web Update dialog box text strings Web Update Setup can look for updated software at the This is a conditional dialog box that is it Conditional Hewlett Packard Web site appears only if the Setup program
49. Scale to Fit off left and on right When the size for which the document is formatted that is the logical size differs from the target size the preview image uses a dashed gray line to show the boundaries of the logical page in relation to the target page size of Normal Size option The 96 of Normal Size option provides a slider bar for scaling the percentage setting The default setting in the entry box is 100 percent of normal size Normal size is defined as the paper size selected within the driver or what the driver receives from the program if the program does not negotiate paper size with the driver The driver will scale the page by the appropriate factor and send it to the printer The limits of the range are from 25 percent to 400 percent and any values outside the range are clipped to those limits as soon as the focus is removed from the control that is when the TAB key is pressed or another control is selected Any change to the scale also changes the page preview which increases or decreases from the top left corner of the preview The slider bar controls the scale directly The value in the edit box changes as the scroll bar indicator is dragged and the preview image is updated to the new image scale Each click on the scroll bar arrows increases or decreases the scale by one percent Each click on the slider bar affects the scale by 10 percent You cannot achieve an exact value by dragging the scroll bar indicator a
50. Software Technical Reference Easy Install drop down menu Click the Install button to install Printer Descriptions Classic hp LaserJet Utility Classic Installation Notes Classic hp LaserJet Help Classic Disk space available conditional Approximate disk space needed conditional The folder HP LaserJet Folder will be created on the disk Macintosh HD name may vary Select Folder button Quit button Install button default option If you want to install the files in a location other than the default Macintosh HD click Select Folder to specify a location You can also choose a Custom installation option from the drop down menu at upper left Click the Read Me button to open the Installer readme file Click the Install button to start the installation on the selected disk Click the Quit button to quit the Installer without making changes to the system Installation for Macintosh IBM OS 2 and Linux operating systems 181 hp LaserJet Installer _ Custom Install Printer Descriptions Classic hp LaserJet Utility Classic Installation Notes Classic t O hp LaserJet Help Classic USB Components Classic hp Manual Duplex amp Booklet Classic Disk space available 408 080K Approximate disk space needed r Install Location Rems will be installed on the disk Cloud 9 install Location Cloud 9 T Figure 76 HP LaserJet Installer dialog box
51. The HP LaserJet printing system software is available for download from the HP Web site at the following URL http www hp com go lj4200 software http www hp com go lj4300 software The software supports the following operating systems Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP Printer firmware Firmware to support the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers is available for download from the HP Web site at the following URLs http www hp com support 1j4200 firmware http www hp com support 1j4300 firmware Use the notification option to be notified of new firmware releases Standalone drivers The HP LaserJet PCL 5e PCL 6 and PS drivers are available individually to support the following operating systems Note Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP PCL 5e is not supported in Asian languages Operating system driver bundles The HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 PCL 5e PCL 6 and PS drivers are available in bundled configurations to support the following operating systems Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP Software Technical Reference Driver features 123 Point and print bundles The HP LaserJet PCL 6 driver is available in a point and print bundle to support the Windows operating environments Other operating systems Drivers and related software are available for these additional
52. Tray 1 CELE ANY SIZE 2 foo LETTER STANDARD OUTPUT N A AMTIA A MIM 4 ny AIPA Figure 1 Device Status page Software Technical Reference Software description 31 Configuration information The HP LaserJet printer configuration page is available remotely through HP Web Access The HP Web Access configuration page provides configuration information about the printer in the same way as the configuration page printed from the printer The following illustration shows an example of a configuration page viewed remotely through HP Web Access h hp LaserJet 4200 63 230 114 161 LaserJet 4200 Configuration Product Name hp LaserJet 4200 Printer Name hp LaserJet 4200 Printer Model Printer Serial Number Firmware Datecode 20020808 04 000 0 Other Links Service ID 00000 hp instant support PS Wait Time out 300 seconds Order Supplies Page Gount 164 Product Support Preventive Maintenance Interval 200000 Pages Since Last Maintenance 162 oo SOOM AM AMEN Figure 2 Configuration page Links to off printer solutions Links within the home page of HP Web Access provide an easy way to locate information or complete tasks e Instant Support This link connects you to a set of dynamic Web resources that help you solve specific problems and determine additional services that might be available for your device Specific status and configuration information ab
53. WindowsSpoolerDSRates section for similar update intervals An administrator could speed up lower the interval or slow down increase the interval these Status check rates by modifying an HPSTATUS INI file and then replicate that file on all of the client systems This is done by copying the file to each client s WINDOWS directory If however the clients are running a shared version of Windows 95 Windows 98 or Windows Me then simply putting the HPSTATUS INI in the server s SYSTEM directory would also suffice Table 99 LegacyPrinterDSRates section _ _ LessOften 120000 When the Status check rate slider control is set to the LessOften print jobs will use the value for this key to check the status of a print job Update job state every 2 minutes LessOftenPlusOne When the Status check rate slider control is set to the LessOftenPlusOne print jobs will use the value for this key to check the status of a print job Update job state every 1 minute and 30 seconds Middle When the Status check rate slider control is set to Middle print jobs will use the value for this key to check the status of a print job Update job state every 40 seconds MoreOftenLessOne When the Status check rate slider control is set to the MoreOftenLessOne print jobs will use the value for this key to check the status of a print job Update job state every 30 seconds MoreOften When the Status check rate slider contr
54. before retrying Retry1 1 Retry2 1 Number of times to repeat the retry1 loop in the event of a failure before failing completely Waiting timeout2 milliseconds before repeating the retry1 loop bidilevel This section controls the bidirectional protocol level at which queries are performed on the device Table 105 bidilevel section Bidilevel Performs standard PML get requests from the device Software Technical Reference Engineering Detail 237 2 Performs advanced PML multi get requests from the device This value should only be used for Jetdirect cards that have a firmware version higher than G 05 35 If the bidilevel is set to 2 and the printer frequently errors out with the error EIO 82 0180 the bidilevel must be set 1 This bidilevel setting will help improve response time but due to bad firmware in the Jetdirect card it can cause errors in the printer Default values after installation Enabling or disabling Printer Status and Alerts support The execution of Printer Status and Alerts is controlled by the registry entry HKLM SOFTWARE Microsoft Windows CurrentVersion Run with the value HP Status This entry will run HPSTATUS EXE every time the system is started up When you close Printer Status and Alerts by right clicking the Printer Status and Alerts tray icon and selecting Exit you are prompted to restart Printer Status and Alerts on startup If you select No don t start automatically this entry will be r
55. communication query that is initiated through the Update Now button in environments that support bidirectional communication Job Storage Enabled determines whether Job Storage appears as a feature on the Destination tab Because this is the only possible Destination Feature for the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers this also determines whether the Destination tab appears Printer Memory Total Memory This shows the total amount of memory physically installed in the printer The default values for total printer memory are specified in the Printer Model section of the Configuration tab and are based on the printer model If you select Printer Hard Disk the Job Storage check box is selected as the default setting Selecting Printer Hard Disk also selects the Mopier Enabled check box as the default setting for all HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers Total printer memory is updated through a successful bidirectional query or can be set manually Driver Work Space Use the Driver Work Space DWS option to specify the amount of work space memory available to the printer In environments that support bidirectional communication this option is configured automatically To manually set DWS print a configuration page and find the DWS value in the Memory section of the configuration page The DWS value might change if you switch printer model settings Then type that value in the DWS box in the More Configuration Options dialog box An accura
56. contained in each physical paper tray on the printer Many printers support more than one source of paper such as upper and lower trays You can assign a form which defines the paper size and margins to each of your printer s paper sources Once a form is matched to a source you can select the form when you print from your programs The printer prints from the tray to which that form is assigned The purpose of the form to tray section allow network administrators to specify for the driver the media sizes that are loaded into each of the available paper trays The use of forms constrains the choices available in the media size lists on the Paper tab This constraint prevents or reduces the likelihood of tying up the printer with paper mount messages caused by users who request sizes or types that are not available Note Changes made to the Device Settings tab are not reflected in the Printing Preferences until the M E modified device settings have been applied For example the duplexing unit will not appear until you have modified the Device Settings tab applied the settings and then re entered Printing Preferences HP LaserJet 4200 4300 software CD ROM In box file layout The HP LaserJet printer system consists of two partitions one for installation using Windows operating systems the other for Macintosh operating systems The files include both documentation files and files required to install and uninstall the systems HP La
57. directly from the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 software CD ROMs or obtain them from the HP Web site at one of the following URLs http www hp com support lj4200 or http www hp com support Ij4300 Albertus Extra Bold CG Times Italic Marigold Albertus Medium Installation for Macintosh IBM OS 2 and Linux operating systems Software Technical Reference e Clarendon Condensed Bold e Symbol e Antique Olive e Coronet e New Roman e Antique Olive Bold e Courier e Times New Roman Bold e Antique Olive Italic e Courier Bold e Times New Roman Bold Italic Arial Courier Bold Oblique e Times New Roman Italic e Bold e Courier Italic e A Univers Bold e Bold Italic e Garamond Antiqua e Univers Bold Italic e Italic e Garamond Halbfett e Univers Condensed Bold Italic e CG Omega e Garamond Kursiv e Univers Condensed Medium e Omega Bold e Garamond Kursiv Halbfett e Univers Condensed Medium Italic e Omega Bold Italic e Letter Gothic e Univers Medium e Omega Italic e Letter Gothic Bold e Univers Medium Italic e CG Times e Letter Gothic Italic e A Univers Italic e Times Bold e Times Bold Italic Software Technical Reference Installation for Macintosh IBM OS 2 and Linux operating systems 177 Wingdings CG Times Bold Italic Installing the Macintosh printing system On a Macintosh compatible computer the installation procedures
58. environments HP has provided hooks between HP Web Access and HP Web JetAdmin so that Web Access features can be configured on multiple printers in one operation For example the security password for HP Web Access can be set on a population of printers simultaneously For additional information and a copy of the HP Embedded Web Server for HP LaserJet Printers guide go to one of the following Web sites http www hp com support 1j4200 http www hp com support 1j4300 To view information about the printer by using HP Web Access open a supported Web browser and type in the printer TCP IP address or host name To find the TCP IP address look for IP Address on the enhanced input output EIO Jetdirect page in the TCP IP section under Protocol Information To find the host name of the printer look for Host Name in the TCP IP section To print a copy of the EIO Jetdirect page from the printer control panel display see the instructions for printing a configuration page in the Determining the current level of firmware section You also can view information about an installed HP Jetdirect print server by clicking the Networking tab in the HP Web Access window Information tab HP Web Access offers the following additional features To view the information click the items on the menu that is on the left side of the HP Web Access Information tab e Device Status This page provides current status information about your printer e Config
59. exists among paper source size and type and you choose to keep the conflicting settings the settings are processed in the following order paper size paper type and then paper source For information about media types and sizes see Media attributes Type Is The Type Is drop down menu shows all the paper types that the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers support as well as any user defined types that have been created by a network administrator The default setting is Unspecified which allows the program to select the paper type No mechanism exists for manually adding custom paper types through the driver Custom sizes can be added only by using the bidirectional communication mechanism so they must already exist in the printer when the bidirectional 76 Driver features Software Technical Reference query occurs If bidirectional communication is enabled then the information returned is an updated list of paper types If bidirectional communication is not enabled then the driver looks for custom paper types saved from a previous bidirectional communication query and uses those Otherwise no custom paper types are available through the driver The following standard types appear in the lists e Cardstock e Color e Labels e Letterhead e Plain e Preprinted e e Recycled e Rough e Transparency e Unspecified e Envelope For more information about media types and sizes see M
60. gt olal e hp LaserJet 4200 PCL 6 Eu Software description Cancel Job Software Technical Reference Figure 7 Printer Status and Alerts window Note The appearance on the screen varies according to the HP LaserJet printer and its configuration The Printer Status and Alerts window consists of two panes The left pane shows icons for the available printers an icon for each current print job in progress and an Options icon The right pane provides information based on what is selected in the left pane The buttons at the top can be used to perform the following functions e arrow Return to the previous pane e Right arrow Go to the next pane e Circular arrows Refresh the pane e Return to the device status e Clock face Show print job history Click a printer icon in the left pane to view information about the printer and supplies or to view a history of recent print jobs The following printer information is available Device Status indicates the current status of the HP LaserJet 4200 or 4300 series printer Supplies shows information about the percentage of print cartridge life remaining Media provides information about paper handling devices and the status of each device For example this section of the window shows the level of media present in each input device as well as the status of output devices This section also provides information about the type and size of media loaded in each
61. in this file For example the 8150 PS driver has an entry in the DSM file that looks like this HP LaserJet 8150 Series PS supported 1 The DSM can also have entries that specifically prohibit known drivers that status does not support Driver Model Name NotSupported driverFileName x y z 1 This type of entry is used by status to exclude support for a specific driver model name by using a specific driver file and version For example the 8500 PCL drivers for Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me and Windows NT 4 0 are not supported because the printer drivers are not written so that status proxy drivers can hook the OS functions they call Disabling support for these types of drivers is accomplished by having the following entries in the DSM HP CLJ 8500 PCL NotSupportedJHPCPCLA DRV 1 0 0090 1 windows 9x pcl driver is not supported HP CLJ 8500 PCL NotSupportedJHPCPCLA DLL 1 0 0090 1 windows NT4 Kernel Mode driver is not supported Software Technical Reference Engineering Detail 239 Troubleshooting If Printer Status and Alerts is conflicting with some other program or if a specific driver model is causing problems perform the following steps to resolve the appropriate issue General problem solving To determine the state of Printer Status and Alerts and the printers it is currently monitoring and to discover how to remove a specific printer consult the following table Table 106 Problem solving Solution s Descriptio
62. input device e Capabilities provides information about such things as installed trays paper handling devices and disk storage Also listed are DIMM slots the printer serial number and the firmware date code Click a print job icon to see information about the progress and status of the print job Click the Options icon to select options for configuring pop up status windows that contain document alerts and to set the refresh rate for showing printer status information Printer Status and Alerts 10 x Select an item a G HF Color hp LaserJet LaserJet 85 4200 PCL Options for 5 ck rate 2 rz For Printers Check printer status networked during your jobs only gt a Never Less Often More Often HP LaserJet 4100 PCL 5 hp LaserJet 4200 PCL 5e Cancel Job Figure 8 Refresh rate option Note The appearance of the screen varies according to the HP LaserJet 4200 or 4300 series printer and its configuration Software Technical Reference Software description 39 There six settings for the refresh rate The default setting is halfway between Less Often and More Often The Less Often setting specifies the least frequent update intervals which have minimal impact on network traffic The More Often setting updates the status more frequently but also has the most impact on traffic The Never setting disab
63. input trays and output bins You can also preconfigure most driver feature settings Five of the driver features can be locked to prevent end users from changing settings print color as gray input tray output tray and media type Continuous export The term Continuous Export refers to the ability of the driver to copy the last set of driver settings back to the working copy of the Pre configuration file In this way when the driver is upgraded for the same printer by a compatible version of the driver the exported values can be applied For instance if orientation is set to Landscape in an installed version of the HP LaserJet 4200 PCL 6 driver for Windows NT 4 0 then the orientation setting in the newly upgraded HP Software Technical Reference Engineering Detail 195 LaserJet 4200 PCL 6 driver for Windows XP will be automatically set to Landscape Continuous export functions transparently from the user s perspective and will only work between drivers with identical model names Note Not all driver parameters can be exported however the list will always be the same as those that can be pre configured The following table shows drivers and operating systems that support DMC Table 86 Operating systems that support Driver Management and Configuration Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP Wizard PCL 5G Wizard PCL 6 UndierPCLSc LYs UnidriverPOL6 _ Yes__ C PS
64. install hp LaserJet 4200 PCL Driver hp Laserjet 4200 PCL Se Driver E Laseret 4200 FS Diver E Automatic Driver Configuration Printer Status and Alerts fi Desenption Space Required Space Available Provides PostScript compatibility and Features lt Back New gt Cancel Figure 67 Components dialog box Custom Installation Note The appearance of this screen might vary depending on printer and connection type Table 62 Custom Installation dialog box text strings itle of dialog box Text in dialog box User options and descriptions Components Select the components you want to install Components Description Space Required Space Available Next takes you to the Printer Name dialog box Back returns you to the Installation Type dialog box Cancel takes you to the Exit Setup dialog box NOTE Custom Installation automatically selects the options that are available in the Typical Installation You can also select from among the following components PCL 6 driver PCL 5e driver PostScript driver Automatic driver configuration Printer Status and Alerts 160 Installing Windows printing system components Software Technical Reference Product registration HP WebReg The HP LaserJet software CD ROM browser provides two options for registering the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers e registration through the Internet to the http register hp com Web sit
65. installer to select any of the languages on the HP LaserJet software CD installer includes the HP LaserJet Uninstaller Utility e Product registration is available using the Web and e mail e Customization Utility is available on the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 software CD ROMs All of the Windows system components are installed by using the HP LaserJet printing system installer The installer automatically senses your language of choice and your operating system It offers selections for each printer model You can select the type of installation you prefer Typical Installation or Custom Installation When performing a Web installation the installer compares the versions of the software components on the HP LaserJet software CD ROM to those on the HP Web site If newer versions are on the HP Web site the installer downloads them Software description Software Technical Reference Installable components This section provides information about the various installable components available either with the HP LaserJet software CD ROM or from the HP Web site Printer drivers HP supports the use of older drivers with new printers Because earlier legacy HP LaserJet printers might have different versions of the PCL language new drivers are not supported with legacy printers The drivers associated with each printer use the version of PCL language that is installed in the printer The printing system for the HP LaserJet 4
66. is any value except is not available Normal Size to 100 100 Effects tab The of Normal Finishing tab Booklet Printing To use this feature set of Size setting is any value except is not available Normal Size to 100 100 Effects tab The of Normal Finishing tab Pages per Sheet To use this feature set of Size setting is any value except is not available Normal Size to 100 100 Paper tab Type Is setting is Finishing tab Bubble Help This feature is not available with Transparency Labels or points to the Print on Both the currently selected paper type Envelope Sides check box Paper tab The Size Is setting is Finishing tab Bubble Help This feature is not available with for any envelope points to the Print on Both the currently selected paper size Sides check box Paper tab The Size Is setting is Finishing tab Bubble Help To use this feature set the paper for anything except Letter Legal points to the Booklet Printing size to Letter Legal or A4 or A4 drop down menu which is not available Paper tab The Source Is tray in Paper tab Bubble Help points to In order to use this feature the Other Pages mini tab is the Type Is drop down menu choose a source tray that is same as the one defined in the different from tray used for the first First Page mini tab page Effects tab Number of Effects tab Bubble Help points You cannot add a new watermark watermarks exceeds 30 to Watermarks because
67. is open will remain in the paper size list in the Paper tab The following table lists options that appear when you click the Close button Table 14 Close dialog box text strings If the drop down menu contains And the button says Then this happens when the Close button is clicked Untitled Save The dialog box closes but you lose the changes that were not saved The current paper size remains the same as it was when the Custom button was selected user typed text gt The dialog box closes but you lose the changes that were not saved The current paper size remains the same as it was when the Custom button was selected name of saved item Delete The dialog box closes and the current paper size is set to that which was last shown in the drop down menu user typed text gt The dialog box closes but you lose the changes that were not saved The current paper size remains the same as it was when the Custom button was selected Source Is The Source Is drop down menu shows the input trays available according to Configure tab settings The list contains the following options e Auto Select e Manual Feed e Envelope Feeder if installed e Trayi Tray2 e 3 if installed e Tray 4 if installed The default setting is Auto Select which allows the printer firmware to select the media source Any optional paper trays that are installed through the Configure tab are also shown here If a conflict
68. legal size paper with the Print Document On option selected and the target size specified as Letter El 1 11 inches RR 11 inches Figure 18 Preview images Legal Letter Scale Fit off left on right When the size for which the document is formatted that is the logical size differs from the target size the preview image uses a dashed gray line to show the boundaries of the logical page in relation to the target page size of Normal Size option The of Normal Size option provides a slider bar to use for scaling the percentage setting The default setting in the entry box is 100 percent of normal size Normal size is defined as the paper size that is selected within the driver or what the driver receives from the program if the program does not negotiate the paper size with the driver The driver scales the page by the appropriate factor and sends it to the printer The limits of the range are from 25 percent to 400 percent and any values outside the range are clipped to those limits as soon as the focus is removed from the control that is when the TAB key is pressed or another control is selected Any change to the scale also changes the page preview which increases or decreases from the top left corner of the preview The slider bar controls the scale directly The value in the edit box changes as the scroll bar indicator is dragged and the preview image is updated to the new im
69. levels of functionality e Windows 95 e Windows 98 e Windows Millennium Edition Me e Windows NT R 4 0 Service packs through 6 e Windows 2000 Service packs 1 and 2 e Windows XP Professional and Windows XP Home Edition Windows XP e IBM 5 2 2 0 or later available on the Web site at http www ibm com e Mac OS 8 6 to 9 x and Mac OS X Classic Windows Terminal Server Windows Cluster Server and Citrix Terminal server technology accommodates as many as 128 devices or terminals to share the resources dynamically on a terminal server A terminal server eliminates the need for modems network interface cards programs or complete operating systems on the terminals Terminals can include personal computers so called dumb terminals printers and other devices Terminal clients connect to the terminal server through Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP Citrix Metaframe supports connection through TCP IP NETBIOS Extended User Interface NetBEUI Internetwork Packet Exchange Sequenced Packet Exchange IPX SPX and asynchronous modem connections In turn the terminal server connects to a local area network LAN through a network interface card For information about supported printers and driver versions including a list of supported printers recommendations for installing printer drivers a description of terminal server configurations differences between terminal server versions and diffe
70. operating environments e Macintosh OS PPDs and Universal Installer e 05 2 PCL 5e and PS Software component availability The following table lists the availability of HP LaserJet software components by operating system Note In the following table 9x Me refers to Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows Me 2K refers to Windows 2000 4 0 refers to Windows NT 4 0 and XP refers to Windows XP Table 19 Software component availability for HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers o Compmen 9xMe 40 2KXP OS 2 Mac UNIX Linux _ o PObG 00000 2 I PCL 6 Unidriver B O PELIS PScript Driver amp Postscript Printer Description PPD x x x OS 2iBMDrers _ 1 7 UnxModelSopt Linux Printing Architecture EE 222 Common Windows installer XE Customization Utiity Fons INF File Add Printer x gt lt gt lt gt lt x gt lt gt lt LFowhsalrt oo Macintosh Installer for OSs8 ar49 Macintosh InstallerforOSX o Sd WebRegstalon X Bidirectional communication O O X X Network Bidirectional Communications 7 X Direct ConnectBidrecton
71. options support 134 Index installation requirements for Macintosh 05 2 Linux operating systems 173 installation requirements for Windows operating systems 137 printer features 20 Bubble 54 constraint 53 constraint 98 MFP module support in drivers 134 adding for Windows 95 98 and Me 201 adding for Windows NT 4 0 2000 and XP 198 availabilty by operating system 124 moire effect handling 64 collation settings 120 description 120 enabling in driver 87 enabling in driver 120 MS EMF output support 127 multipurpose tray See trays making print agents 231 using to install drivers 231 NetWare See Novell NetWare operating systems configuring settings 34 configuring settings 35 statistics 35 Network Bidirectional Communications 124 bidirectional communication support 127 driver support 127 Networking tab HP Web Access 34 bidirectional communication support 27 bindery versus NDS connection 208 building bindery queues 219 building NDS queues 223 determining the server connection 208 installing drivers using NDPS 231 installing the Novell Client software 208 loading drivers 231 making NDPS print agents 231 making user policies 232 network administrator software 208 removing printer objects from the Novell server 226 setting up an NDS installed client to operate in bindery emulation mode 209 using HP JetAdmin to build queues 214 NT Forms tab in drivers 91 installing 26 Bubble 54 for drivers 53 for Macintosh operati
72. profiles for Macintosh operating systems 174 command line silent install for Windows 168 paper source 204 paper type 207 Configuration Page HP Web Access 32 Configure tab in drivers 85 e mail alerts 36 network settings 34 network settings 35 printer options remotely 33 protocols 35 security 34 bidirectional communication support 27 driver support 127 printer features 20 description 53 driver support 98 driver support 129 context sensitive help 98 continuous export 128 control panel page showing layout 30 Copies option in drivers 83 Copy Count option in drivers 100 cover back option in drivers 103 covers for booklets 61 Current Watermarks options in drivers 111 custom installation for Windows 159 driver support 132 Custom Paper Size option in drivers 73 custom Quick Sets 59 customer support for product 32 availability by operating system 124 description 48 description 167 document properties 63 Quick Sets 57 watermarks 69 deleting print jobs 117 Destination tab in drivers 113 destinations enabling in driver 87 Device Information page HP Web Access 30 247 Device Settings tab in drivers 119 Device Status page HP Web Access 31 diagnostics information 35 different paper sizes printing documents with 102 DIMMs dual inline memory modules status 39 Direct Connect Bidirectional Communications 124 directory structure for files on printing system software CD ROM 121 EAC Enterprise AutoConfiguration 202 job tracking tem
73. same location on the Paper tab and the Configure tab On the Destination tab the printer image contains hot spots for selecting an output bin When the pointer moves over a hot spot the arrow reverts to the gloved hand used in the Bubble Help the preview image and other areas The current output bin is highlighted in a bright green color on the printer bitmap Note On the Destination tab only output bins have hot spots and can be highlighted source trays must be selected from the Paper tab 82 Driver features Software Technical Reference Basics tab features The Basics tab provides options for setting the number of copies to be printed and for the orientation of the print job You can also use it to retrieve information about the driver E hp LaserJet 4200 PCL 6 Properties 2 x Finishing Effects Paper Destination Basics m Quick Sets Untitled Save Copies 8 5 by 11 inches Copy Orientation Portrait Landscape Rotate by 180 degrees About A Cancel Figure 25 Basics tab Copies Use the Copies feature to specify the number of copies to print The number of copies you request appears in the Copies box You can select the number by typing in the box or by using the up and down arrows to the right of the edit box Valid entries are numbers from 1 to 9999 for the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers The copies val
74. the list is full You can edit existing watermarks or you can delete unused ones to make more room Bidirectional communication is not Configure tab Update Now The configuration settings cannot installed button is not available be updated automatically because bidirectional communication is not available Software Technical Reference Driver features Message Finishing tab The Print on Both Basics tab Bubble Help points Only one copy is allowed per job Sides check box is selected and to the Copies option for manual duplex printing To the Allow Manual Duplexing change this feature first disable check box on the Configure tab the Print On Both Sides option is also selected Finishing tab features 8 5 by 11 inches Pint Page Borders Rage Fight then Down Figure 12 The default appearance of the Finishing tab The options in the Print Quality group box might vary depending on your HP LaserJet 4200 or 4300 series printer The Finishing tab contains a document preview image and three group boxes Quick Sets Document Options Print Quality Document preview image The preview image is a line drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text For color printers the bitmap contents appear in color while for monochrome printers the contents appear in tones of gray The image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right side up The preview image appears in t
75. the maximum valid entry while any entry that is smaller than the minimum limits of the width and height control is rounded up to the minimum valid entry See Custom width and height control limits If units are in millimeters the custom paper size range minimum is the limit rounded up to the nearest whole millimeter The custom paper size range maximum is the limit rounded down to the nearest whole millimeter Any non numerical entry reverts to the last valid entry Width and height entries are validated when the focus has changed The resolution of each control is one millimeter or one tenth of an inch depending on the current measurement units Clicking the up and down arrows increases or decreases the current value by the increment amount within the allowed range of values The computer determines the rate at which the values change Unit indicator labels change dynamically to indicate inches or millimeters depending on the measurement units the driver is currently using To change measurement units click the Measurement Units button Custom width and height control limits The minimum paper size for the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers is 98 mm by 191 mm 3 87 inches by 7 5 inches and the maximum is 216 mm by 356 mm 8 5 inches by 14 0 inches The following table summarizes paper size limits for each paper handling device Table 13 Custom width and height limits for the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers Media sour
76. the server and double click the printer share name In Network Neighborhood locate the server and then drag and drop the icon for the shared printer into your Printers folder In the Printers folder open the Add Printer Wizard The next action depends on the operating system For Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows Me click Network Printer For Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP click Network printer server Client only 10 Click Next Type the network path or queue name or select Browse to search the o saren e Client only 11 In Network Neighborhood locate the server and double click Then locate the printer share name and right click Client only 12 Click Install to complete the installation through the Add Printer Wizard Setting a default printer This section applies to the Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP operating systems 1 From the Start menu click Settings and then click Printers 2 Select the printer you want to set as the default printer 3 From the File menu click Set As Default A check mark appears next to the menu option 4 Click Close Windows 3 1x Printer support e The HP LaserJet 4200 series and HP LaserJet 4300 series printers have not been tested with and are not supported with Windows 3 1x Software Technical Reference Installing Windows printing system components 171 172 Installing Windows printing system compon
77. timeout 237 Web site 30 export continuous 195 exporting driver parameters 195 extension for driver 84 FastRes option in drivers 104 features of the printer 20 file layout for printing system software CD ROM 121 Finishing tab in drivers 56 date code 39 determining current level 41 downloading 123 downloading 41 fulfillment information 122 updating remotely 41 See Also remote firmware update First Page option in drivers 102 Flip Pages Up option in drivers 59 Font DIMM option in drivers 89 Index Font Settings options in drivers 64 availability of DIMMs by operating system 125 configuring for watermarks 68 configuring for watermarks 112 DIMM support in drivers 134 euro characters 46 installers 124 localization 126 PS Level 3 emulation 92 send TrueType as bitmaps 64 send TrueType as bitmaps 101 supported for IBM operating systems 191 supported for Macintosh operating systems 175 supported for Windows operating systems basic 138 supported for Windows operating systems default 138 supported for Windows operating systems PS 92 supported for Windows operating systems PS 139 Fonts option in drivers 89 Form to Tray Assignment option in drivers 121 front to back printing 100 remote firmware update on a direct network connection 43 remote firmware update using a browser 44 fulfillment information for printing system software related software and firmware 122 generic printer description GPD for PCL 5 driver 124 GPD generic pr
78. transformed from the firmware OID number such as 2 8 2 1 10 1 A set of Object ID to printer management language PML mappings appear in the registry A component called NRA queries the Object IDs in the registry from the printer and sets the corresponding PML value to what the printer returns The driver then parses these PML values to determine the printer s configuration For example when NRA asks the printer for the Object ID that corresponds to hrMemorySize the printer returns a value such as 6553610 and this value is stored in the hrMemorySize registry key The driver then reads this value and sets the printer memory configuration to 64 MB Note The printer model name is not tied to a UI control but the driver uses the printer model name to verify that it is communicating with the correct printer model Note The default UI settings are based on the printer base bundle Note The strings that are returned from firmware for the various paper source and destination options are not included in this table Table 3 Driver UI controls set by bidirectional communication Ul PML object for control PML Corresponding object ID default default setting value Printer N A MODEL_NAME 01 03 06 01 04 01 0 02 03 09 04 02 01 01 03 02 00 model name Driver 7 74 HOST APPLICATION 6400 01 03 06 01 04 01 0B 02 03 09 04 02 01 01 02 3B 00 space AVAILABLE MEMORY 10 Duplexing clear prtMediaPathType2 6400 01
79. using the Point and Print method will not activate Printer Status and Alerts Software Technical Reference Software description 37 When the Printer Status and Alerts feature is installed a status icon the form of a printer is included in the Windows system tray in the lower right corner of the screen The printer icon remains unchanged until you send a print job to the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers When you send a print job the icon changes to alert you to the status of the print job Eight icons exist in this feature The eight icons in the following illustration show current job status Neither the Receiving nor the Waiting icon ever shows up in the Systray When the print job is in a receiving or waiting state the Printing icon appears in the Systray The icons behave differently depending on whether the printer is connected through a direct connection universal serial bus USB or parallel or through a network gt Receiving Unknown Printing 2 0 Walling Stopped Warming Finished Failed Canceled Canceling Figure 6 Printer Status and Alerts icons Double click the status icon to open the Printer Status and Alerts window shown in the following illustration hp LaserJet 4200 PCL 6 Select an item HP Color hp LaserJet LaserJet 85 4200 PCL fs s um ats HP Lasewet Lasenet 4100PCL6 4200PCL5e 38
80. your printer The following table provides information about the operating systems and network environments that support bidirectional communication Table 2 Bidirectional communication support in various operating systems Connection type Windows Windows Windows Windows 98 NT 4 0 2000 XP 32 EE BENE Direct connect port Share Network oe gra IPX LR LR a NT HP Tr D d D D S PX a eal LPR Novell4 Toe Bindery iau tm LB LESS La 093 queue 222 Bindery qe qe NDS Hes te bee 5 Microsoft Windows TCP IP LX LE x 95 98 IPX 4 0 LPR X Software Technical Reference Software description 27 Not supported 2Bidirectional functionality is supported only with the client software from Novell It is not supported with Microsoft Client Service for NetWare 3Novell Directory Services 4Printer Status and Alerts is not installed when the share computer is running Terminal Server Bidirectional interface and connectivity The following table lists the driver user interface UI controls bidirectional communication sets when the user clicks Update Now or when Enterprise Auto configure is initiated To the right are the corresponding PML counterparts The Corresponding Object ID column shows the values that the driver INF file inserts into the registry as
81. 0 Sheet Stapler Stacker is configured on the Configure tab the Staple option is included on the Finishing tab Optional paper sources The Optional Paper Sources drop down menu lists optional paper sources for the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers The list of available paper sources varies depending on your printer its input accessories and the printer configuration settings on the Configure tab For the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers five optional paper sources are available The settings in the Optional Paper Sources drop down menu are as followings e None the default setting for the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 and 4200n and 4300n models e 500 Sheet amp 1 500 sheet Input Tray e 2 500 Sheet Stackable Trays the default setting for the HP LaserJet 4200tn and 4300tn 4200dtn and 4300 4200dtns and 4300dtns and 4200dtnsl and 4300dtns models e 1 500 sheet Input Tray e 500 Sheet Stackable Tray Other options The Other Options group box contains a single More command button Clicking the More button opens the More Configuration Options dialog box Software Technical Reference Driver features 87 Storage If your printer has a hard disk installed you can use the Storage section to specify whether Job Storage is enabled Job Storage is automatically enabled if Printer Hard Disk is selected The printer hard disk control can be set manually or updated by using a successful bidirectional
82. 03 06 01 02 01 2b 0d 04 01 09 01 02 unit check 10 box Total 64 MB HrMemorySize 6400 01 03 06 01 02 01 19 02 02 00 memory 10 control Mopier selected MOPY MODE 6400 01 03 06 01 04 01 00 02 03 09 04 02 01 02 04 01 01 00 enabled 10 check box Hard disk clear hrDiskStorageMedia2 6400 01 03 06 01 02 01 19 03 06 01 02 02 check box 2 10 01 03 06 01 02 01 19 03 06 01 02 04 Option None PHD1 MODEL 01 03 06 01 04 01 0b 02 03 09 04 02 01 04 01 07 03 01 04 00 paper PHD6 MODEL 01 03 06 01 04 01 0b 02 03 09 04 02 01 04 01 07 03 02 04 00 destinations drop down list 28 Software description Software Technical Reference Ul PML object for control PML Corresponding object ID default default setting value Optional None PHD1 MODEL 01 03 06 01 04 01 0b 02 03 09 04 02 01 04 01 07 03 01 04 00 paper PHD6 MODEL 01 03 06 01 04 01 00 02 03 09 04 02 01 04 01 07 03 02 04 00 Sources drop down list No Mediai5Name 01 03 06 01 04 01 0b 02 03 09 04 02 01 04 01 08 03 0F 01 00 user Media19 Name 01 03 06 01 04 01 0b 02 03 09 04 02 01 04 01 08 03 13 01 00 defined types Driver Autoconfiguration The HP LaserJet PCL 6 and PCL 5e drivers for Windows feature bidirectional communication technology which in supported environments provides automatic discovery and driver configuration for printer accessories at the time of installation or later if needed Some accessories that are supported by Driver Autoco
83. 171 proxy server 124 PS driver features for Windows 95 98 Me and NT 4 0 92 remote firmware update 42 supporting the printing system software 25 System requirements 137 Windows Terminal Server 25 XL 3 0 support 127 XL color support 127 XPS fonts supported for Macintosh operating systems 175 ZENworks 232 RK Index invent copyright O 2002 Hewlett Packard Company
84. 200 and 4300 series printers include the following printer drivers PCL 5e PCL 6 and PS drivers The PCL 5e PCL 6 and PS drivers are included with the HP LaserJet software CD ROM The PCL 5e and PCL 6 drivers feature a graphical user interface that has a shared look and feel Note PCL 5e is not supported in Asian languages If a Typical Installation is chosen during installation of the printing system software the PCL 6 driver is set as the default driver All three drivers provide access to the printer paper handling and print quality features Windows 95 98 Me NT 4 0 2000 and XP driver versions PCL 5e and PCL 6 support for Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP operating systems is provided by using the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 printer drivers for the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers For Windows 2000 and Windows XP the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 generic printer description GPD provides information about printer features for the PCL 5e and PCL6 drivers The HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 PS printer description PPD provides PS feature support for the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series products You can view the printer driver version number by clicking the HP logo in the lower left corner of the following HP PCL 5e and PCL 6 printer driver tabs e Configure e NT Forms e Finishing e Effects e Paper e Destination e Basics Macintosh and Macintosh compatible system d
85. 24576 PS_10269 TTF PS_12968 TTF PS 10369 TTF PS 10370 TTF PS T4514 TTF PS 14515 TTF PS T0249 TTF PS 10267 TTF PS_10268 TTF PS T4512TTF PS T4511 TTF PS_10267 TTF 5_24509 5_13872 PS 19874 PS_13875 1TF PS_14053 1TF PS T4054 TTF PS 14051 TTF PS 19875 PS_13870 TTF PS_13871 TTF PS 12542 TTF PS12544 TTF PS 10695 TTF PS 12545 TTF PS 12543 PS 14526 TTF PS 14528 TTF PS 14529 TTF PS 14527 TTF PS 24519 TTF PS 24521 TTF PS 24522 1TF PS 24520 1TF PS 24525 PS PS_14505 1TF 0 PS 04 140 Installing Windows printing system components Software Technical Reference Hienme 2777 Fonmame O PS 13777 TTF Letter GothicPS Installation instructions General installation for Windows 95 98 Me NT 4 0 2000 and XP General installation instructions for the Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP operating systems are similar If the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers are connected through a file or print server the HP LaserJet printing system software must first be installed on the server before being installed on any client systems If the HP LaserJet printing system software is not first installed on the server bidirectional communication some Driver Autoconfiguration methods and Printer Status and Alerts will not be available to the client systems
86. 27 constraints support 129 248 continuous export feature 195 Destination tab 77 Destination tab 113 Device Settings tab 97 Device Settings tab 119 DMS Driver Support Matrix file HPSASDRV MTX 239 document layout features support 129 document options 59 Driver Management and Configuration DMC support 128 Driver Management and Configuration DMC support 196 EAC Enterprise AutoConfiguration support 196 Effects tab 65 Effects tab 108 enabling accessories 86 excluding or removing from Printer Status and Alerts 243 exporting parameters 195 Finishing tab 56 Finishing tab 105 Help feature support 128 INF file requirements for Windows 95 98 and Me 199 INF file requirements for Windows NT 4 0 2000 and XP 197 installable components 49 installable options support 134 installation for Windows 169 installation using Windows Point and Print 170 installing in Novell NetWare operating systems using NDPS 231 Job Storage options 78 job storage support 130 Job Storage tab 94 job stream output support 127 Layout tab 98 loading into Novell NetWare operating systems 231 localization 126 localization support 134 NT Forms tab 91 operating system bundles 123 Other Pages tab 71 Page Setup tab 92 paper sizes support 132 paper source commands 204 paper sources support 133 Paper tab 69 paper type support 133 Paper Quality tab 101 print controls support 130 Print Quality options 63 printer model inf
87. 4 g m 45 10 The following table identifies the media types that are supported by the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers stapler stacker Table 93 HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 Stacker and Stapler Stacker Output media types Stapler Stacker Staceerbim J Booklet bin Y Pan 206 Engineering Detail Software Technical Reference Recycled Card stock 1Mechanically feasible but impractical 2Media must be properly oriented when loaded in selected input trays 3Up to a weight of 199 grams per square meter Between 199 grams per square meter and 216 grams per square meter only face up delivery is supported covers are supported Stapling is allowed to a maximum weight of 199 grams per square meter PCL 5e and PCL 6 custom paper sizes Note The PS driver does not support user defined media sizes The following table shows custom paper sizes available for the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers Table 94 PCL 5e and PCL 6 custom paper sizes Way Dimensons Minmum Mexmum Tay Trays 3 amp 4 500 5551 Trays 3 amp 4 1 500 sheet 210 mm 8 27 inches 279 mm 11 0 Inches Envelope feeder Duplexing unt 257 mm 10 12 inches Paper Type commands The PCL 5e escape sequence for paper type is Esc amp n Wdpapertype where n is the number of characters in the paper type plus 1 For example in the sequence Esc amp neWaPlain
88. 421 OOMES255C9D ODD 1EE27732E 0001E627E070 0001E627E0C6 0001E627E32C DDD1EB289437 Port 1 0001 6289497 2 0001 6289497 3 2 Figure 96 New Device dialog box Find the MAC Hardware number that corresponds to that on the Configuration page This is usually found on the second page EIO Jetdirect Page under the subheading HP Jetdirect Configuration listed as the hardware address Now click Configure Note On some printers the EIO printout is separate from the configuration printout 216 Engineering Detail Software Technical Reference In the next window type the name of the printer and a description or the location of the printer Software Technical Reference Engineering Detail 217 Figure 97 General Device Information dialog box Click Next Use the Netware dialog box to build either a NetWare Directory Services queue or a bindery queue A third option is to bypass this window by clicking Next leaving the default settings You can then make the TCP IP assignments without building a queue Figure 98 NetWare dialog box 218 Engineering Detail Software Technical Reference Building a bindery queue Internal To build a bindery queue leave the fields on the right see the previously shown figure General Device Information dialog box unconfigured and select the Queues icon on the left as shown in the following illustration
89. 4300 series 64 MB RAM expandable to 416 MB 4200 series 80 MB RAM expandable to 416 MB 4300 series Software Technical Reference e 35 ppm letter size media 34 ppm A4 size media 4200 series e 45ppm letter size media 44 ppm A4 size media 4300 series e 35 ppm letter size media 34 ppm A4 size media 4200 series e 45 ppm letter size media 44 ppm A4 size media 4300 series Parallel connection HP Jetdirect 10 100Base TX print server card for network connection Parallel connection HP Jetdirect 10 100Base TX print server card for network connection 100 sheet multipurpose tray tray 1 maximum paper size legal 216 mm by 356 mm 8 5 by 14 inches two 500 sheet trays trays 2 and 3 maximum paper size legal 216 mm by 356 mm 8 5 by 14 inches optional high capacity input 1 500 sheet tray one 100 sheet multipurpose tray tray 1 maximum paper size legal 216 mm by 356 mm 8 5 by 14 inches two 500 sheet trays trays 2 and 3 maximum paper size legal 216 mm by 356 mm 8 5 by 14 inches duplexing unit for automatic two sided printing optional 1 500 sheet tray Purpose and scope 1200 dpi ProRes 600 dpi dual beam scanner 12 000 page print cartridge 4200 series 18 000 page print cartridge 4300 series 1200 dpi ProRes 600 dpi dual beam scanner 12 000 page print cartridge 4200 series 18
90. 5 55 CB 55 55 55 55 2 55 55 55 555 a 55 55 55 555 55 55 55 555 2 5 55 55 555 E B aad Pref an dE Braker TR 4 es Device Filters IPX SPX Devices i TCP IP Devices 214 Engineering Detail Software Technical Reference Figure 94 HP JetAdmin Utility window In the Preferences window shown here click Default Protocol and make sure IPX SPX is selected Return to Jet Admin by clicking OK General Default Protocol TCPAP Discovery IPX SPX Discovery Schedule r c Loi 8 0 A Choose TCP IP or IPX SP as the default protocol This is used to determine the name to display and security access to use for s gt configuration r Default Nama C ICPAP N 845 ok Cancel Help Figure 95 Preferences dialog box If you are installing a new printer or if you performed a cold reboot on an existing printer with a Jetdirect card or server click Device from the HP JetAdmin Utility menu bar see following illustration and then click New This opens the dialog box in the following illustration which lists the media access control MAC address also referred to as the hardware address of all of the unconfigured devices and resets Jetdirect cards and servers Note Print a printer configuration page to find the MAC address of the Jetdirect card Software Technical Reference Engineering Detail 215 001 2
91. 7 standalone drivers 123 media types supported 206 sources and destinations 203 Stapling Options in drivers 108 configuring refresh rate 234 configuring update interval for queries 235 configuring update interval for spooler information 235 configuring when alerts and warnings appear 234 devices 31 disabling temporarily for job tracking 238 jobs 39 supplies 30 viewing for devices in Printer Status and Alerts 39 stored jobs 79 stream output mode support 127 ordering 32 viewing status 30 viewing status 39 support for product 32 description 25 Printer Status and Alerts support 37 test page and diagnostics 35 text printing all as black 64 for bidirectional connection 237 for EWS connection 237 253 for print jobs 237 toner saving with EconoMode 64 configurations 204 custom sizes 75 enabling in driver 87 input media supported 206 installable options support 134 paper source commands 204 status 39 Printer Status and Alerts 240 remote firmware update 45 using HPBDRVHI EXE utility 243 viewing diagnostics information 35 TrueType sending as bitmaps 101 Type Is options in drivers 103 types of media supported 204 Unidriver for PCL 6 and PCL 5 drivers 124 printer software for Macintosh operating systems 179 Printer Status and Alerts 243 availability of drivers 50 availability of software components 124 model scripts 50 remote firmware update 43 unknown job troubleshooting 240 updating firmware remotely See remote firmware update
92. 75 Important dialog box text strings itle of dialog box Text in dialog box User Options and Descriptions Important To set up your HP LaserJet printer use Click OK and then continue installing the one of the following methods printer using either the AppleTalk Chooser AppleTalk Open the Chooser in the or USB LPR Apple icon menu and select a printer USB LPR Open the Desktop Printer Utility and select a printer Before vou can use printer wich vour Compute you rriact get it uo on sour pyeten Using the Choocer For inetructions click the right b tne Hah FUES Figure 80 How do I select my printer dialog box 184 Installation for Macintosh IBM OS 2 and Linux operating systems Software Technical Reference Table 76 How do select my printer dialog text strings Title of dialog box Text in dialog box User Options and Descriptions How do select my printer For instructions click the right arrow This is a standard Macintosh OS help Topics button sequence HP LaserJet Screen Fonts Installer dialog box sequence This section provides information about the installation dialog box sequence for the HP Screen Font Installer seres hp Laserjet Mr ios Screen Fonts Schermlette run Polices d cran Bois H Nayt kinjasiniay AWF Bildschirmschriften Skjermfont Obrazovkove typy pima Sk mlypsniH Fontes de leo Skaermskrilt
93. 95 98 Me and NT 4 0 This section provides information about the features of the Windows PS printer driver PS Level 3 Emulation support for the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers The PS Level 3 Emulation maintains full compatibility with Adobe PS Level 3 when PS Level 3 soft fonts are purchased from Adobe A set of 92 PS Level 3 soft fonts is included with the printing system software If you want to permanently install the fonts in the printer PS Level 3 emulation fonts are also available from HP in an optional font DIMM Users of Adobe licensed programs might also have the right to use the Adobe PS level 3 printer drivers from Adobe with the HP LaserJet printer PS Level 3 emulation PPD available on the HP LaserJet printer software CD ROM or from the HP Web site When using the Adobe PS Level 3 printer driver users must comply with all Adobe licensing agreements as stated on the Adobe Web site at http www adobe com support downloads license html See Font support for a list of the additional fonts Note The driver interface shown in this section is for Windows NT 4 0 The order and appearance of tabs can vary among operating systems Page Setup tab features The Page Setup tab contains controls for the following options e Paper Size e Paper Source e Count e Orientation 92 Driver features Software Technical Reference 000000000000 Hue 0000 9 Figure 30 Page Setup
94. 96 escape sequence for paper source 204 features for Windows 2000 and XP 97 features for Windows 95 98 Me and NT 4 0 53 Help feature support 128 installable options support 134 job storage support 130 job stream output support 127 localization 125 localization support 134 paper source commands 204 point and print bundle 124 print controls support 130 Printer Status and Alerts support 233 stream output mode support 127 types and sizes of media supported 204 Unidriver 124 user interface support 128 watermarks support 132 description 174 Percentage of Normal Size option in drivers 66 PINs using for private and stored jobs 96 PML requests 237 Point and Print installation for Windows operating systems 170 point and print bundle for PCL 6 driver 124 portrait orientation 84 portrait orientation option in drivers 59 portrait orientation options in drivers 99 PostScript Printer Definition PPD files See PPD PostScript Printer Definition files PostScript Printer Description PPD files See PPD PostScript Printer Description files description 174 availability by operating system 124 localization 125 preview image 56 printer features 20 print controls support in drivers 130 Print Document On option in drivers 65 252 Print Document On options in drivers 109 deleting 117 deleting 81 Print on Both Sides option in drivers 59 Print Page Borders option in drivers 107 Print Quality options in drivers 63 documentation 26 features 20
95. API DLT HPBOIDPS DL HPBOIDPS DLT HPBPROPS DL HPBPROPS DLT HPJCMN2U DL_ HPJCMN2U DLT HPJIPX1U DL HPJIPX1U DLT HPPAPTSO DL HPPAPTSO DLT HPPASNMO DL HPPASNMO DLT DestinationDirs DefaultDestDir 66000 HPBF4121 FILES 66000 AUTOCFG_FILES 66000 HPAUTO_FILES 66000 SourceDisksFiles x86 HPBF412E DL_ 1 HPBF412F DL_ 1 HPBF412G DL_ 1 HPBF412H DL_ 1 HPBF4121 PM_ 1 HPBF4121 DL_ 1 HPBF412L HL 1 HPBF412J DL 1 HPBF412K DL 1 HPDCMON DL 1 200 Engineering Detail Software Technical Reference HPBAFD32 DL_ 1 HPBFTM32 DL_ 1 HPNRA EX_ 1 HPBOID EX_ 1 HPBPRO EX_ 1 HPPAPMLO EX_ 1 HPBNRAC2 DL 1 HPBMIAPI DL 1 HPBOIDPS DL 1 HPBPROPS DL 1 HPJCMN2U DL_ 1 HPJIPX1U DL_ 1 HPPAPTSO DL_ 1 HPPASNMO DL_ 1 Adding mini installer files The DLL is always called the same thing but it provides an identification ID parameter so that drivers can specify which version of the mini installer should be used Version tolerance exists in the mini installer INI file by requiring that the INI file be renamed if it changes in any way from its previous state These files also be copied into the driver directory CopyFileseHPBF4121 FILES AUTOCFG FILES HPAUTO FILES HPAUTO FILES HPBMINT DL HPBMINT DLL HPBMINI DL HPBMINI DLL INI File FileName HP INI File gt DestinationDirs DefaultDestDir 66000 HPBF4121 FILES 66000 AUTOCFG_FILES 66000 HPAUTO_FILES 66000 SourceDisksFiles x86 HPBF412E DL_ 1 HPBF412
96. Attributes Watermark Message Name Arial h Color EE Gray Z Message Angle Shading Diagonal Very light Y Horizontal Size Style 52 Regua Cancel Figure 43 Watermark Details The dialog box shows a preview image and provides options for creating a new watermark and controlling the message angle and font attributes Click OK to accept all changes made in the Watermark Details dialog box However clicking Cancel does not cancel all changes If you make changes to a watermark and then select a different watermark or click New all changes made to the previous watermark are saved and only the current unsaved changes can be canceled Current Watermarks The Current Watermarks group box contains a list of available watermarks both predefined watermarks made available in the driver and any new watermarks you have created To create a new watermark click New The new watermark appears in the Current Watermarks list and in the Watermark Message edit box as Untitled until you Software Technical Reference Driver features 111 Note name it To name the new watermark type the selected watermark text in the Watermark Message edit box To delete a watermark select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list and click Delete You can have no more that 30 watermarks in the Current Watermarks list at one time When the limit of 30 watermarks is reached the New button is disabl
97. Continue button Exit button Installing Windows printing system components Click the Continue button to go to the second screen in this sequence Click the Exit button to open the Exiting Registration dialog box Software Technical Reference Hewlett Packard s Electronic Registration invent Where will your new Hewlett Packard product primarily be used Which Hewlett Packard product did you purchase When did you purchase your Hewlett Packard product Serial Number Exit Please tell us about the Hewlett Packard product that you purchased Personal use fi 1 12 2002 Figure 71 Hewlett Packard s Electronic Registration dialog box 2 of 3 Table 66 Hewlett Packard s Electronic Registration dialog box text strings 2 of 3 Title of dialog box Text in dialog box User options and descriptions Hewlett Packard s Electronic Registration Software Technical Reference Please tell us about the Hewlett Packard product you purchased Where will your new Hewlett Packard product primarily be used drop down menu Which Hewlett Packard product did you purchase drop down menu When did you purchase your Hewlett Packard product field Serial Number field Approximately how many employees work at your site Worldwide What is your job responsibility as it relates to HP products Click the Previous button to go back to the first screen in this sequenc
98. E 237 BostJob Timer 237 leleiga ien a 237 237 Software Technical Reference Enabling or disabling Printer Status and Alerts 238 Disabling Job 238 Adding or removing Printer Status and Alerts printers 238 Adding support for a specific nennen 238 Removing support for a specific 238 Removing support for a specific driver nennen 239 Driver Support Matrix HPSASDRV MTYX ssssssssssssseeseeene nennen nennen nsn n nnn nsn neret sinn 239 DSM Aun 239 15 Re EE 240 General problem 240 The HPBDRVHLEEXE Utility cd cec rn tette itae eere cete riu tbe eee dte nace ae 243 Printer Status and Alerts is causing problems with a specific driver model 244 For Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows 245 FOr Windows NT 4 Em 245 For Windows 2000 and Windows 2 0 000 00 245 For all operating SYStOIMNS i icc csssececccueedsvhenseseenaesswhadeneecdcansahegeeseenedsupncdeseepessuviacdeccezssunntegeceeeesdvens 245 Printer Status and Alerts is conflicting with other
99. Each of the three four or five available selections depending on the printer connection type causes the Printer Status and Alerts window to automatically appear when that alert condition arises The availability of each alert option and the default selection varies depending on connection type The following table shows the default state of the alerts panel as it relates to connection type Table 4 Default alerts selection state for connection type Connection type Alerts first two Printer warning Toner low Printer error apis condition _ All printers Selected and Selected and Selected and Selected and PT sive eenaa seated 1 Direct connect Selected and Selected and Selected and Selected and activated activated activated activated Network Selected and Selected and Unselected and Selected and activated activated grayed out activated l Activated means that the option is available selected means that the option is selected by default Printers that are involved with at least one active print job are queried for job status periodically according to the Status Check Rate setting If an error or a warning condition is detected the Printer Status and Alerts window will automatically appear according to the Alerts options Note Depending upon the options you select information in the status window changes for each job printed o each job completed and each warning condition detec
100. F DL_ 1 HPBF412G DL_ 1 HPBF412H DL_ 1 4121 1 HPBF4121 DL_ 1 HPBF412L HL 1 Software Technical Reference Engineering Detail 201 HPBF412J DL 1 HPBF412K DL 1 HPDCMON DL 1 HPBAFD32 DL 1 HPBFTMS2 DL 1 HPNRA EX 1 HPBOID EX 1 HPBPRO EX 1 HPPAPMLO EX 1 HPBNRAC2 DL 1 HPBMIAPI DL 1 HPBOIDPS DL 1 HPBPROPS DL 1 HPJCMN2U DL_ 1 HPJIPX1U DL_ 1 HPPAPTSO DL_ 1 HPPASNMO DL 1 HPBMINI DL 1 HPBMINT DL 1 INI File FileName gt HP_ 1 Disabling Enterprise AutoConfiguration Note 202 Use the following steps to modify the INF to remove the components necessary for Enterprise AutoConfiguration EAC The INF file should be modified only by administrative terminal system ATS personnel Please notify the appropriate Tech Marketing Product Manager if you receive a request for EAC to be disabled Within the Driver Package INF files for EAC enabled drivers the Installation section looks something like this Installer Sections HPBF5111 PMD DataSectionzHPBF511l DATA NON EAC Copy Sections Un Comment to Disable EAC CopyFileseHPBF5111 FILES LANGMON FILES EAC Copy Sections Comment to Disable EAC CopyFileszHPBF5111 FILES LANGMON FILES AUTOCFG FILES HPAUTO FILES DataFile HPBF5111 PMD Engineering Detail Software Technical Reference To disable EAC in a driver simply comment out the CopyFiles that are indicated in the instructions in the INF The exact contents of the CopyFiles lines might dif
101. FastRes 1200 v Figure 16 Print Quality Details Default For the HP LaserJet PCL 6 and PCL 5e drivers the Default mode contains the following options Resolution is FastRes 1200 Rendering mode is automatic PCL 5e only Scale Patterns WYSIWYG is selected Print all Text as Black is not selected Send TrueType as Bitmaps is not selected Resolution Enhancement technology REt is on Output Settings group box The Output Settings group box contains controls for selecting resolution and other print job settings including pattern scaling and printing all text as black Software Technical Reference Driver features 63 Resolution The resolution setting for the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers is 600 dpi Scale Patterns WYSIWYG The Scale Patterns WYSIWYG feature is implemented to address the moir effect created when certain programs encounter certain patterns Use this feature to turn off the pattern scaling What you lose is WYSIWYG with patterns but the printed result might look better The feature works only with programs that use vector hatch patterns This option is on by default Print all Text as Black The Print all Text as Black feature is off by default When selected this option causes the driver to print all text as black regardless of the original document text color By design however white text remains white as a fail safe method of printing reverse typeface against a dark background This setting do
102. Find field and then click Go The printer Status window appears Locate the Update button You might need to click the right arrow on the toolbar to locate this button Click Update When prompted for the type of update to perform click Update Printers and then click Continue Under Upload new firmware image click Browse to locate the RFU file you downloaded from the http www hp com support lj4200 firmware or http www hp com support 1j4300 firmware Web site depending on the printer Click Upload to move the RFU file from your hard drive to the HP Web JetAdmin server Refresh the browser Select the RFU file from the Select new firmware version drop down menu 10 Click Update Firmware HP Web JetAdmin sends the selected RFU file to the printer Also HP Web JetAdmin 6 5 can be used to perform multiple or unattended installations 1 2 NO gt 8 Start HP Web JetAdmin Create a device group A simple way to do this is a Click Devices on the 1 Choose drop down menu b Click Device Model from the 2 Filter drop down menu c In the 3 Criteria Optional field type your model number for example 4200 or 4300 without quotation marks d Click Go In the Device List select the printers you want to include in the group and then click Create Group When prompted type a name for the new device group and then click OK Click Update When prompted for the type of update to perform click Update P
103. IMM should now be available the system Note When using font DIMMs with the PCL 5e and PCL 6 drivers To install screen fonts that match the font 7 DIMM use the HPB file specifically designed to work with that DIMM If there are no screen fonts for the DIMM use the PCM file specifically designed to work with that DIMM Ignore Application Collation The following table shows the expected behavior for a two page print job when the number of copies is three Table 15 Printer behavior with Ignore Application Collation settings Hard disk Ignore Application Commands Pages sent to Pages output on printer Enabled Application Collation sent by printer printer from printer check box Collation check box in check box Print dialog 9x 1 2 1 2 1 2 None ee eee 121212 71 1222 LYesNo Of Of On 121212 7121212 12 1212 QTY 3 1 2 1 2 Placing the Ignore Application Collation setting in the printer properties means that on a Windows NT network clients connecting to the printer through a network share cannot change its value only the network administrator can decide how the printer driver is set up You cannot use the Ignore Application Collation setting to print non collated copies If you want to print non collated copies disable mopying Automatic configuration If you have modified the configuration of the HP LaserJet 4200 or 4300 series printer since installation c
104. Installation Type dialog box If the Help me option is selected Next initiates a series of question dialog boxes that help you determine the best connection type option to follow This series begins with the Cable Type Selection dialog box Back returns you to the Type of Connection dialog box Cancel takes you to the Exit Setup dialog box Installing Windows printing system components 149 Network Printer Configuration i x How do you want to identify the network printer you are installing Search from a list of available printers Specify a printer by address invent m Description Searches the local network for printers and allows you to choose your printer from a list of discovered printers Help lt Back Cancel Figure 56 Network Printer Configuration dialog box Table 52 Network Printer Configuration dialog box text strings Title of dialog box Text in dialog box User options and descriptions Network Printer Configuration How do you want to identify the If you click Search from a list of 150 network printer you are installing available printers Next takes you Search from a list of available to the Identify Printer dialog box printers option button If you click Specify a printer by Specify a printer by address address Next takes you to the Identify Printer dialog box Always choose Specify a printer by Description address when the printer address is availa
105. N Private jobs are deleted if power to the printer is removed Software Technical Reference Driver features 115 Stored Job Note The Stored Job option allows you to send a print job directly to the printer hard disk The print job will be stored in the printer as if it is an electronic file cabinet After the print job is stored in the printer s hard disk you can print the job from the printer control panel The job remains stored on the printer until it is deleted or overwritten by a document with the same user and job names Stored jobs remain on the printer hard disk when power is interrupted Use this feature for forms and other common or shared documents A stored job can be handled in two ways as either a private or a public job A private stored job allows you to send a print job directly to the printer memory and can be printed only after you type a PIN in the printer control panel You can set the PIN in the Print dialog box After the job is printed the job remains in the printer memory and can be printed again from the printer control panel This feature is useful when you are printing sensitive or confidential documents you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing Private mode is initiated by clicking the Require PIN to Print check box In this mode a PIN entry at the control panel is required to release the job The box labeled PIN is usually inactive The Require PIN to Print option is activated if you click Store
106. Printer Dialog Extensions PDEs See PDEs Printer Dialog Extensions printer drivers See drivers Printer Model information in driver 85 adding and removing printers 238 availability by operating system 124 bidirectional protocol level 237 causing problems with specific drivers 244 configuring when status and alert information appears 234 conflicting with other programs 245 description 37 disabling job tracking temporarily 238 enabling support 238 engineering detail 233 enumerating all printers supported 243 excluding or removing drivers 243 HPSTATUS INI file 234 icons 38 INF file 234 localization 125 navigating 39 product model and driver support 233 refresh rate 234 requirements 37 restrictions that apply to HP products 37 timeout bidirectional connection 237 timeout EWS connection 237 timeout print jobs 237 troubleshooting 240 uninstalling for specific or all printers 243 update interval for direct connect printers 236 update interval for queries 235 update interval for spooler information 235 adding and removing for Printer Status and Alerts 238 changing properties for IBM operating systems 193 enumerating all supported by Printer Status and Alerts 243 newly installed but not showing up in Printer Status and Alerts 240 renamed but new name not detected 240 setting default for Windows 171 support for Windows 3 1x support for Windows 3 1x 171 CD ROM for Windows systems 47 components 47 downloading 123 installation no
107. Quick Copy stores a copy of a printed job on the hard disk after which you can print additional copies of a print job at the control panel The number of quick copy print jobs that can be stored in the printer is set from the printer control panel Note The printer configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick copy or proof and hold jobs The number is set at the printer control panel in the Configuration menu and the default is 32 When this preset limit is reached a newer document will overwrite the oldest Also a document that has the same user and job name as one that is already stored on the hard disk will overwrite the existing document Quick Copy jobs are deleted if the printer s power is removed Proof and Hold This option stores the print job on the printer hard disk and prints only the first copy of the job allowing you to check the first copy If the document prints correctly you can print the remaining copies of the print job at the printer control panel The number of proof and hold print jobs that can be stored in the printer is set at the printer control panel Using a PIN for Private Job and Stored Job The Private Job and Stored Job options can be secured by a four digit personal identification number PIN This number must be typed in the printer control panel before the printer prints the job The box labeled PIN is usually inactive Selecting Private Job or Stored Job along with Require PIN to Print activates t
108. Reference Printer Status and Alerts The HP LaserJet printing system software includes a utility called Printer Status and Alerts that you can use to monitor print jobs and printer status from the desktop The Printer Status and Alerts feature provides printer and job status information such as printing history job progress toner and paper levels and consumables and supplies reorder information and presents a simulated view of the printer control panel This utility offers several options for configuring pop up windows to view the status of the printer and of individual print jobs Printer Status and Alerts is a selectable component of Custom Installation To install Printer Status and Alerts choose Custom Installation and select the appropriate check box Printer Status and Alerts features are available for printers connected by means of a connection whether direct or over a network that supports bidirectional functionality The Printer Status and Alerts feature cannot be installed over infrared IR or serial ports See Bidirectional communication For Windows 95 the Microsoft Winsock2 patch must first be installed To download the Microsoft Winsock2 patch go to http www microsoft com windows95 downloads contents WUAdminTools S WUNetworkingTools W95Sockets2 Default asp For all operating systems the computer must have Internet Explorer version 4 72 or later installed version 5 0 or later is recommended HP Printer Status and Aler
109. Setup closes the Installer program program now the program will not be Resume takes you to the dialog box you installed that most recently canceled You can run the Setup program at a later time to complete the installation To continue installing the program click Resume To quit the Setup program click Exit Setup Custom installation The custom installation gives you the option of installing the following components e LaserJet 4200 or HP LaserJet 4300 PCL 6 driver for direct connect and network installations e LaserJet 4200 or HP LaserJet 4300 5e driver for direct connect and network installations e LaserJet 4200 or HP LaserJet 4300 PS driver for direct connect and network installations e Automatic Driver Configuration for direct connect for Job Status only and for network installations e Printer Status and Alerts for direct connect for Job Status only and for network installations e Screen fonts for direct connect and network installations e HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 User Guide for direct connect and network installations Note The components of a Custom Installation might vary from printer to printer Note Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP computers running a terminal server do not support the Printer Status and Alerts option Software Technical Reference Installing Windows printing system components 159 Components Components Select the components you want to
110. Strings 183 Important dialog box text 0 184 How do select my printer dialog text 0 185 HP LaserJet Screen Fonts splash screen dialog text strings 185 HP LaserJet Screen Fonts installer dialog text strings 1 of 2 186 HP LaserJet Screen Fonts installer dialog text strings 2 of 2 186 Installation was successful dialog text 0 187 HP LaserJet for Macintosh installer splash screen dialog box text strings 187 HP LaserJet Installer dialog text strings easy install 188 HP LaserJet Installer dialog text strings custom install 189 Installing dialog text strings 2000400 190 Installation successful dialog text strings 190 Operating systems that support Driver Management and Configuration 196 Drivers that support Enterprise AutoConfiguration 196 HP LaserJet 4200 4300 series printers paper sources and destinations 203 Paper tray configurations for the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers 204 Paper source 204 Supp
111. To print on both sides click Print from the program click the Properties button click the Finishing tab and then click Print on Both Sides Mopier enabled A mopier is an HP designed printer that produces multiple collated copies from a single print job Multiple original printing mopying increases printer performance and reduces network traffic by sending the job to the printer once then storing it on the hard disk The remainder of the copies are printed at the printer s fastest speed All documents can be created controlled managed and finished from the desktop which eliminates the extra step of using a photocopier The HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers support the Transmit Once mopying feature The Mopier Enabled option is selected by default if a hard disk is installed and Printer Hard Disk is selected in the driver software Envelope feeder This check box should be selected if an envelope feeder unit is installed on the printer Selecting the Envelope Feeder option causes the envelope feeder bitmap to be superimposed on the printer s bitmap image When the Envelope Feeder check box is selected the choice of Envelope Feeder is added to the Paper tab Source is dropdown menu Its order in the list should directly follow Manual Feed Optional paper destinations The Optional Paper Destinations drop down menu contains the following options e None e 500 Sheet Stacker e 500 Sheet Stapler Stacker If the 50
112. UJ e Screen Fonts invent Custom Installation Recommended for advanced users and system administrators Provides more flexibility for installing drivers and software EN Figure 62 Installation Type dialog box Note The components of a Typical Installation might vary from printer to printer Table 57 Installation Type dialog box text strings itle of dialog box Text in dialog box User options and descriptions Installation Type Choose the installation type If Typical Installation is selected Next Typical Installation takes you to the Printer Name dialog box Custom Installation If Custom Installation is selected Next Recommended for advanced users and takes you to the Components dialog box system administrators Provides more Back returns you to the printer Model flexibility for installing drivers and software dialog box Cancel takes you to the Exit Setup dialog box Software Technical Reference Installing Windows printing system components 155 I x Specify a name for this printer You may use the name supplied below and or type a new one The name will be used to identify the printer in your Printers folder Printer Name LaserJet 4200 NOTE printer will be created for each driver being installed h The driver type will be appended to the name specified above jJ Example HP LaserJet 3000 PCL invent m Default Printer Use this printer as the default printer for Windows
113. Usage Page HP Web Access 30 bidirectional communication support 127 driver support 127 Use different paper option in drivers 102 user policies for Novell NetWare operating systems 232 UTF 8 encoding for PJL 127 vector graphics 101 version number for driver 84 configuring for Printer Status and Alerts 234 configuring update interval for direct connect printers 236 configuring update interval for queries 235 configuring update interval for spooler information 235 driver support 132 Watermarks options in drivers 66 Web JetAdmin See HP Web JetAdmin Web Registration See HP Web Registration Adobe 92 EWS embedded Web server 30 firmware 123 firmware download 41 HP Web JetAdmin 51 Linux printer support 173 ordering software CD ROMs 122 printing system software 123 printing system software related software and firmware 122 product registration 161 supported printers and printer drivers 25 UNIX model scripts 50 What s this help 97 What s this Help 53 Windows Cluster Server 25 availability of software components 124 bidirectional communication support 27 Driver Management and Configuration DMC support 196 254 driver versions 49 fonts supported 138 installation using Point and Print 170 installers 124 installing printer software 141 PCL 5e and PCL 6 driver features for Windows 2000 and XP 97 PCL 5e and PCL 6 driver features for Windows 95 98 Me and NT 4 0 53 printer support for Windows 3 1 printer support for Windows 3 1x
114. X P i ___ X X 71 Chinese X X Traditional Chinese X X Simplified X X X X X X X 134 Driver features Windows NT 4 0 Windows 95 98 Software Technical Reference 53535 Windows 64 amp 32 Windows Windows NT 4 0 Windows 95 98 2000 X X X X XI X X x lt X PostScript specific X X Norwegian X X X X X X X X X X Table 41 Driver support for PostScript specific features Windows 64 32 Windows Windows NT 4 0 Windows 95 98 2000 Pos PS PS PS X PS PS PS Fonsubsiuin PostScript X mmo E S Output protocol Send CTRL D mesh 0 Send CTRL D sweep Convert gray text to PostScript gray Convert gray graphics to PostScript gray MEM Add Euro umeney smo Job meut o Wait timeout Minimum font size to download as Minimum font size rot i Lis i o a to download as bitmap PostScript Send PostScript 8 ES X X x X X X X X X E B a Rede ae Ls c Software Technical Reference Driver features 135 Windows 64 amp 32 Windows Windows NT 4 0 Windows 95 98 2000 Optimize for Eme _ 0 ee Optimize for
115. Your hp LaserJet 4200 printer has been successfully installed Your system needs to be restarted You will be prompted to restart your computer later Installation Details h U y Select the actions to perform when Setup finishes invent Print a test page Register Product Figure 65 Finish dialog box Table 60 Finish dialog box text strings Finish Your HP LaserJet printer has been Finish completes the installation process successfully installed and initiates test page printing and Web Installation Details page registration if those options are selected Select the actions to perform when Setup finishes Click Installation Details to open a dialog box that shows installation details NOTE If the computer must be restarted the Print a test page and Web Registration functions will occur after the computer is restarted Print a test page check box Web Registration check box Exit Setup X Setup is not complete If you quit the Setup program now the program will not be installed You may run the Setup program at a later time to complete the installation To continue installing the program click Resume To quit the Setup program click Exit Setup Egit Setup Figure 66 Exit Setup dialog box 158 Installing Windows printing system components Software Technical Reference Table 61 Exit Setup dialog box text strings Exit Setup Setup is not complete If you quit the Setup Exit
116. a parallel port connection Software Technical Reference Software description 45 E mail command and response The HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers can send e mail messages directly However you must configure e mail information to initiate this capability One use for this feature is to send diagnostic information to solve a printer problem An e mail sent to the printer requests configuration information The printer automatically sends that information back to the service provider In many cases the problem can be identified quickly and solved remotely For more information about e mail command and response see the HP Embedded Web Server for HP LaserJet Printers guide To configure your printer to send e mails follow these steps 1 Take note of your printer s TCP IP address on the EIO X JetDirect page this is the second page of the Configuration Page printout The number indicated by X may vary To print a configuration page see Determining the current level of firmware 2 Launch your Web browser 3 Inthe Address or Go to field type the TCP IP address assigned to the printer for example 192 168 0 20 or the host name for example http myprinter The HP Web Access home page appears 4 From the top of the HP Web Access screen click Device 5 Onthe navigational bar on the left click Alerts 6 Under Notification Recipients type your e mail address for example 7 Click Appl
117. aCommunicaions X Enterprise Autoconfiguraon X XY X Poxysewr O o o x Remote managementand status o oooO EX DXX T _ gt lt gt lt gt lt X X Autoconfiguration CX Adobe Acrobat Reader IX _ xx gt lt 124 Driver features Software Technical Reference 7 Compoen xMe 49 2KXP OS 2 Mac UNIX Linux HPlasegei4200and4S00seresprnerimsalatn X X X x HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printer Release Notes x X x XT XTX X HP Fast InfraRed Receiver Guido X XTX MacPSHelp Hep 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 LX LXX PSFonts o EX LXX PS Fonts DIMM A 1 X Xx Supported as a standalone utility Software component localization The following table provides localization information about the HP LaserJet Series Printing system software The information in this table does not necessarily reflect in box solutions Components that are not available in any given language are supported in English gt lt gt lt gt lt System 2000 XP Installation PS PPD 9x 4 0 x X x xXx xy X X X X X xl X X x X X X X x x x x 2000 XP Macintosh LJ ESSEN IB 2
118. able 68 Table 69 Table 70 Table 71 Table 72 Table 73 Table 74 Table 75 Table 76 Table 77 Table 78 Table 79 Table 80 Table 81 Table 82 Table 83 Table 84 Table 85 Table 86 Table 87 Table 88 Table 89 Table 90 Table 91 Driver support for PostScript specific 135 Default fohts 12 ihe DIE 138 Additional PS 3 fonte iO ue 139 Choose Setup Language dialog box text 143 Setup dialog box text Strings idt etin ent be e a adt egt ced 143 Welcome dialog box text 0 777 7 144 HP Software License Agreement dialog box text strings 145 Web Update dialog box text 146 Type of Connection dialog box text 147 Select Port dialog box text 148 Network Setup dialog box text strings 149 Network Printer Configuration dialog box text strings 2 2 150 Identify Printer dialog box text 152 Specify Network Path dialog box text strings 2 2 153 Set Network Communication Mode dialog box text strings 153 Printer Model dialog box text eene 154 Insta
119. above by clicking the appropriate option button These instructions are specific to the Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP environments using the latest available PCL 5e PCL 6 and PS drivers Releasing stored jobs at the printer Once you send a print job using Job Storage you can release the job to print using the printer control panel 1 2 3 4 Press the select button the one with the check mark to enter the menus Press the up and down buttons to scroll to RETRIEVE JOB and then press the select button Press the up and down buttons to scroll to your job and press the select button Press the up and down buttons to scroll to PRINT The PRINT selection might have an icon next to it indicating that the job is locked If so type the PIN number and then press the select button Press the select button Deleting a print job Sometimes it is necessary to delete a print job from the printer memory or hard disk This can be done from the printer control panel 1 2 3 4 Press the select button the one with the check mark to enter the menus Press the up and down buttons to scroll to RETRIEVE JOB Press the up and down buttons to scroll to your job name and press the select button Press the up and down buttons to scroll to DELETE The DELETE selection might have an icon next to it indicating that the job is locked If so type the PIN number and then press the select button
120. age scale Each click on the scroll bar arrows increases or decreases the scale by one percent Each click on the slider bar affects the scale by 10 percent You cannot achieve an exact value by dragging the scroll bar indicator at the default Windows resolution use the scroll bar indicator to approximate the desired value and then use the scroll bar arrows to refine the value The following settings disable of Normal Size e Print Document is selected e Pages per Sheet is not 1 Watermarks 66 Use the Watermarks feature to choose a watermark create your own custom watermarks text only or edit an existing watermark The following watermarks are preset in the driver e e Confidential e Draft e SAMPLE Driver features Software Technical Reference The drop down menu shows alphabetically sorted watermarks that are currently available on the system plus the string none which indicates that no watermark is selected This is the default setting Any watermark selected from this list appears in the preview image When First Page Only is selected the watermark is printed only on the first page of the document The First Page Only check box is disabled when the current watermark selection is none Watermarks are applied to logical pages For example when Pages per Sheet is set to 4 and First Page Only is turned off four watermarks appear on the physical page one on each logical page Click Edit an
121. and not against the standard paper size names The complete set of titles for this button and the specific characteristics that determine its title and capabilities are discussed in the dynamic command button section Name drop down menu The Name drop down menu shows the name of the last selected custom paper size Use the Name drop down menu to type new names for custom paper sizes and to select from the list of currently defined custom paper sizes The name displayed in the Name drop down menu is one of three things depending on the following conditions e Ifa saved custom paper size has been selected from the drop down menu and the other controls in the dialog box have not been changed since then the Name drop down menu shows the name of the last selected custom paper size Software Technical Reference Driver features 73 e Ifthe width or height controls been changed since custom size was selected or saved or if a saved paper size has just been deleted then the Name drop down menu shows the default name of Untitled e name has been typed into the Name drop down menu for the purpose of saving a new size or renaming an existing size then that new name will remain in the drop down menu until a saved custom paper size has been selected from the drop down menu If you type a new name into the Name drop down menu but then do not click the Save button you should be able to change the width and height values withou
122. and specify different media sizes within a single document Any change in the media size selection causes the Booklet Printing feature to be turned off Driver features Software Technical Reference Custom The Custom Paper Size dialog box appears when you click the Custom button on the Paper tab The following illustration shows the initial appearance of the Custom Paper Size dialog box Custom Paper Size 2 x Name Size Width Height mes Jj Use Millimeters Close Help Figure 23 Custom Paper Size dialog box When the Custom Paper Size dialog box appears the drop down menu in the Name group contains one of two things depending on the current paper size selection in the Paper tab If the paper size selection is a previously defined custom size then the drop down menu contains the name of that custom size e Ifthe paper size selection is a standard paper size then the drop down menu shows the default name Untitled for a custom paper size Note In Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows Me two names for the same size media can coexist for example big BIG can both be used as names for custom size paper measuring 8 4 inches by 11 inches In Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP both upper and lower case names can be used but they cannot be used to name the same paper size The new name is compared only against the list of user defined custom paper size names
123. anuals In the field in Item 3 type Installing ZENworks not case sensitive Click Search Now From the search results select the most recent information about installing ZENworks 232 Engineering Detail Software Technical Reference Troubleshooting Internal If an error message appears stating that you do not have the correct rights make sure that you are logged in to the correct server with administrative rights If you are try refreshing Jet Admin by pressing F7 If you still do not have correct rights log in to the server again Be sure to select the tree context and server again to establish a good link with the server If this fails turn the printer off by holding down the green button this button may be labeled variously Go or Start and then turn it on again The printer control panel shows the message COLD BOOT Turn the printer off and on again and then rebuild the queue Printer Status and Alerts Internal HP product models and drivers that support Printer Status and Alerts The following table lists the HP product models and drivers that support Printer Status and Alerts Table 96 Printer Status and Alerts driver support Product model Drivers supported HP Color LaserJet 2500 PCL 6 PCL 5c PS HP Color LaserJet 4500 PCL 6 PCL 5e but not the older RASDD version PS HP Color LaserJet 4550 PCL 6 PCL 5c PS HP Color LaserJet 8500 HP Color LaserJet 85504 PCL 5c PS PGESe PS O HP LaserJet 5000 Series
124. any printer the three current objects must first be deleted To delete an object select the object and then press the DEL key on the keyboard You can also click the first object and simultaneously press the CTRL key to select more than one item Netware Adminishata iat leks amp amp Everyone i TIC2 5XB LB TIC2 PO IRCH 1 PO L DLT12 H IRGRCHH 1 PO ADE PO H ARRCHH 0 admin dh Bor rwn Xn disi ez Pers ugar mar mad meam a de P a D aie ae Engineering Detail 229 Figure 110 NDS print queue objects NWAdmin32 The next screen shows the two objects associated with a bindery queue To build a new queue for this printer the two current objects must first be deleted To delete click the object and then press the DEL key on the keyboard Click the first object and simultaneously press the CTRL key to select more than one item Admin da tetlabS amp g Everyone ll xxx5xB Q XXXXC 2 PO amp XXN 1 PO t Brenda Hrenda 1 4 AZ EMHenl b a 2 5 ZKe b S Mal 1 b amp 2 NOSlan b ME bd ud eer ee et 1 deo Figure 111 Bindery print queue objects NWAdmin32 When all the objects associated with the old queue have been deleted reset the screen by double clicking the 230 container unit object at the top left of the window the first icon in the list the Tst lab5 object in the illustration The listin
125. aper Options group box e Use different paper e Source is e is First Page and Other Pages A cover can have two forms depending on the type of booklet a user is printing e For full size e g LETTER size Letter type booklets select a different media for the first page and add an extra blank back page The front cover may contain print data or be a blank page and can either be pulled from a different paper source or be another media type The back cover may be printed on a different media from the front cover e 2 For two page per sheet 2 up booklet printing a cover is obtained by selecting a different media for the first page only The back cover setting is hidden since this page would otherwise be printed in the middle of a booklet 102 Driver features Software Technical Reference Whenever you make changes to all pages that is when Use different paper is cleared these changes are reflected in both the First Page and Other Pages settings whenever the user sets Use different paper Back Cover The Back Cover allows the user to select an alternate paper source or media type from which a blank page will be drawn and placed after the last page of the document The default selection is that no back cover is printed The settings for Back Cover are not retained when the Use different paper check box is cleared If you select Use different paper and then select Back cover the Add a blank back cover check box appears W
126. arch MONARCH 150 120 100 100 EnvMonarch 100 100 ISOB5 142 118 100 100 ISOB5 100 100 JIS B5 142 100 142 100 100 B5 100 ie nidi 100 176 mm 250 mm 6 93 9 84 inches inches Executive 184 mm 1 EXEC 150 100 120 100 100 Executive 7 25 100 inches NN 26 81 91 100 65 45 29 Double 100 mm 148 mm Post card 3 94 5 83 inches inches Software Technical Reference Engineering Detail 205 2 5 PCL 5 PCL 6 PS commands de X margin margins 16K3 ROC16K 150 120 100 100 W558h774 f 100 100 Custom Minimum Minimum true 2 76 127 3 0 5 0 inches edge Maximum Maximum 148 mm 216 mm 8 5 14 0 inches inches 1 PCL escape sequence for paper size is Esc amp 1 A The values in this column are for 2The PCL 6 command for paper size is ubyte array String MediaSize The values in this column are the values for String Windows NT 4 0 this paper size is treated as a custom size 4For custom sizes the PCL 6 Wizard specifies actual dimensions for example for 8 inch by 9 inch custom size real32 8 000000 9 000000 CustomMediaSize 5The PS command for paper size is PageSize Table 92 Supported input media types Input media types PS string Envelope feeder 1 500 sheet tray Y Y Y Y Y Y vetro mon ny steve I 5 1 1 accepts cardstock at a maximum weight of 16
127. ardless of the PIN Private jobs are deleted if power to the printer is removed Stored Job Note Use the Stored Job option to send a print job directly to the printer hard disk The print job is stored in the printer as if it is an electronic file cabinet After the print job is stored in the printer s hard disk you can print the job at the printer control panel The job remains stored on the printer until it is deleted or overwritten by a document with the same user and job names Stored jobs remain on the printer hard disk when power is interrupted Use this feature for forms and other common or shared documents A stored job can be handled in two ways as either a private or a public job Use a private stored job to send a print job directly to the printer memory which can then be printed only after you type in a PIN at the printer control panel You can set the PIN in the Print dialog box After the job is printed the job remains in the printer memory and can be printed again at the printer control panel This feature is useful when you are printing sensitive or confidential documents that you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing Private mode is initiated by clicking the Require PIN to Print check box In this mode a PIN typed at the control panel is required to release the job The box labeled PIN is usually inactive The Require PIN to Print option is activated if you click Stored Job If selected you must enter a PIN
128. are the same for a network administrator a network client and a single user Install the software on any computer that has access rights to the printer Note If the computer is connected to the printer by a LocalTalk Printer Port or EtherTalk connection the AppleTalk or Network control panel must be configured for the correct connection to communicate with the printer The HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers must be set up connected to the computer and turned on before the software is installed Macintosh OS systems do not support parallel connections You must use a USB connection for a direct connection to a computer running Macintosh OS In the following instructions XXXX represents the HP LaserJet printer model number The Macintosh partition contains an installer program for each language Find the language appropriate for the operating system being used and use the installer program for that language To install the HP LaserJet printer software for Macintosh OS Note Note Note 1 Insert the CD ROM that came with the Macintosh printer software into the CD ROM drive If the CD screen does not open automatically double click the CD ROM icon on the desktop to open the CD ROM window Open the HP LaserJet Installers folder Find the Installer icon for the appropriate language Double click the Installer icon to launch the Installer In the opening dialog click Continue The main Installer dialog box appears Clic
129. art the utility click Customization Utility on the main menu of the HP LaserJet software CD ROM browser The following are available options for creating a customized installation Software Technical Reference Installing Windows printing system components 167 e printer drivers only Using this option you can copy the HP LaserJet Windows printer drivers to a selected form of media disk CD ROM network drive and so on You can use the resulting disk set with the Windows Add Printer Wizard The Customization Utility prompts these choices Operating system e printer model e printing system components drivers to copy e destination path e Create customized installer Using this option you can create either an interactive or silent unattended installer customized by any of the following selections e Operating system e printer model e printing system components e interactive or silent unattended installer e entire printing system installer Using this option you can copy the HP LaserJet printing system installer to a selected form of high capacity media such as a network drive The customization utility prompts these choices e language e operating system Silent installer You can use the HP LaserJet printing system software to create a silent installer that runs the SETUP EXE program without user interaction This installation method is useful when you want to use the default selections that the installer provides o
130. asionally HP communicates information on products and or programs that may be relevantto you Please selectthe method s of communication HP may use to contact you check all that apply E mail Mail Telephone Please don t contact me unless specifically request it Exit Previous Figure 70 Hewlett Packard s Electronic Registration dialog box 1 of 3 Table 65 Hewlett Packard s Electronic Registration dialog box text strings 1 of 3 Title of dialog box Text in dialog box User options and descriptions Hewlett Packard s Electronic Please complete the following Click the Previous button to go Registration required fields are denoted by a back to the Welcome to Hewlett blue asterisk Packard s Registration dialog First name box Middle Initial Software Technical Reference Installing Windows printing system components 163 Title of dialog box Text in dialog box User options and descriptions 164 Last Name Company Organization Name Building Mail Stop Dept Mailing Address City Town State drop down menu Zip Code E mail Address Telephone Number Extension Occasionally HP communicates information about products and or programs that might be relevant to you Please select the method s HP can use to contact you check all that apply E mail check box Mail check box Telephone check box Please don t contact me unless 1 specifically request it check box Previous button
131. at the document for one paper size and then print the document on a different paper size with or without scaling the page image to fit the new paper size The Print Document On control is disabled by any of the following conditions e Percent of Normal Size is not 100 e Pages per Sheet on the Finishing tab is not 1 When Print Document On is selected the drop down menu shows the media sizes on which you can print The list contains all standard media sizes supported by the selected media source and any custom sizes that you have created if the currently selected media source is manual auto or any tray When Print Document On is selected Scale to Fit is automatically selected Scale to Fit option The Scale to Fit option specifies whether each formatted document page image is scaled to fit the target paper size By default Scale to Fit is selected when Print Document On is selected If the setting is turned off then the document page images will not be scaled and are instead centered at full size on the target paper If the document size is larger than the target paper size then the document image is clipped If it is smaller then it is centered within the target paper The following illustration shows preview images for a document formatted for Legal paper with the Print Document On option selected and the target size specified as Letter 1 RRh 11 inches RA hw 11 inches Figure 42 Preview images Legal on Letter
132. ate different paper selection choices for the first page and back cover of the document The first group box in the upper left portion of the Paper tab view is Quick Sets This feature is described in the Finishing tab features section Any change to the Quick Sets group box that is made on the Paper tab affects the group box on the Finishing tab and on the Destination tab and vice versa they are all one and the same control Printer image The bitmap image in the lower right portion of the Paper tab represents the current physical configuration of the printer and corresponds to its configuration data either obtained automatically through bidirectional communication or configured manually It should look the same as the image that appears in the same location on the Destination tab and the Configure tab On the Paper tab the printer image contains hot spots where you can select a paper source When the pointer moves over a hot spot the arrow reverts to the gloved hand used in the Bubble Help the preview image and other areas The current paper source whether selected from the drop down menu or from a printer image hot spot is highlighted in bright green on the printer bitmap The following points are worth noting e Auto Select does not have a corresponding area to highlight in the printer image e Selecting in the drop down menu highlights the corresponding part in the printer image e Selecting the area that represents tray in the bitma
133. ated and the Add Printer Wizard uses the pre existing bidirectional communication to configure the printer If bidirectional communication software has not been installed EAC configures the driver to match the device configuration which it detects automatically EAC is active only as needed to use the autoconfiguration utility and is then shut off The files required to install EAC remain on your system Software Technical Reference Software description 29 HP Web Access The HP Web Access feature also known as the embedded Web server EWS contains the following components e embedded virtual machine for Java TM applications e Web pages e storage space HP Web Access is a standard feature for the HP LaserJet 4200 and HP LaserJet 4300 series printers HP Web Access provides a simple easy to use solution for one to one printer management In offices with a limited number of printers remote management of printing devices can be accomplished without installing any management software such as HP Web JetAdmin The only requirement is that the management console have a supported Web browser In environments with a larger number of printers where one to one management is impractical HP Web Access and HP Web JetAdmin work together to provide scalable remote printer management HP Web JetAdmin is used for consolidated management tasks where operations are performed on a selected set of printers instead of on individual printers For such
134. atforms and the INI file that drives the Mini Installation process which is named so as to ensure that any given driver uses the correct file to install the version of bidirectional communication that is being included in the INF CopyFiles HPBF4121 FILES AUTOCFG FILES HPAUTO FILES HPAUTO FILES HPBMINI DL HPBMINI DLL INI File gt INI File gt DestinationDirs DefaultDestDir 66000 HPBF4121 FILES 66000 AUTOCFG_FILES 66000 HPAUTO_FILES 66000 SourceDisksFiles x86 HPBF412E DL_ 1 Engineering Detail Software Technical Reference HPBF412F DL_ 1 HPBF412G DL_ 1 HPBF412H DL_ 1 HPBF4121 PM 1 HPBF4121 DL 1 HPBF412l HL 1 HPBF412J DL 1 HPBF412K DL 1 HPDCMON DL 1 HPBAFD32 DL_ 1 HPBFTM32 DL_ 1 HPNRA EX_ 1 HPBOID EX_ 1 HPBPRO EX_ 1 HPPAPMLO EX_ 1 HPBNRAC2 DL 1 HPBMIAPI DL 1 HPBOIDPS DL 1 HPBPROPS DL 1 HPJCMN2U DL_ 1 HPJIPX1U DL_ 1 HPPAPTSO DL_ 1 HPPASNMO DL 1 HPBMINI DL 1 INI File FileName HP 1 Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows Me requirements The requirements for Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows Me platforms are more complicated than the requirements for Windows NT 4 0 and Windows 2000 Because of differences in the design and implementation of device driver interface DDI the driver in this environment is not autoconfigured at the time of install Rather the features are set the first time the user has the opportunity to open the driver user int
135. based programs Default Driver PCL 6 lt Back Cancel Figure 63 Printer Name dialog box Table 58 Printer Name dialog box text strings itle of dialog box Text in dialog box User options and descriptions Printer Name Specify a name for this printer You may Next takes you to the Printer Sharing use the name supplied below or type a dialog box new one The name will be used to The default printer name in the text field is identify the printer in your Printers folder HP LaserJet 4200 or HP LaserJet 4300 Printer Name PCL 6 NOTE A printer will be created for each Back returns you to the Installation Type driver being installed The driver type will dialog box be appended to the name specified above Example HP LaserJet 9000 PCL 6 Cancel takes you to the Exit Setup dialog box Do you want your Windows based programs to use this as the default printer Yes option button No option button 156 Installing Windows printing system components Software Technical Reference Printer Sharing 4 Indicate whether this printer will shared with other network users If you choose sharing give this printer a share name Not shared Share as NOTE Exceeding 7 characters may make the printer 7 inaccessible to Windows 95 98 Me clients share will be iB created for each driver type using the name specified above Example LJ 7300 invent Client Driver Support Additional diver
136. ble On large networks selecting Search from a list of available printers might not reveal the location of a specific printer Back returns you to the Network Setup dialog box Cancel takes you to the Exit Setup dialog box Installing Windows printing system components Software Technical Reference Identify Printer xi Select the printer you want to set up Refer to your printer s configuration test page to help you identify your printer Printers on your local network Modl O Hardware Address IP Address Addres hp LaserJet 4200 DOO1EB27D3F1 If your printer is not on the list check your printer s connections then click Refresh Refresh or go back and select Specify a printer by address Help lt Back Cancel Figure 57 Identify Printer dialog box 1 of 2 Network Printer Configuration x How do you want to identify the network printer you are installing Search from a list of available printers DU Specify a printer by address invent a Description Allows you to specify your printer by entering one of the following attributes Hardware Address IP Address IP Hostname or IP Address Help lt Back Cancel Software Technical Reference Installing Windows printing system components 151 Figure 58 Identify Printer dialog box 2 of 2 Table 53 Identify Printer dialog box text strings itle of dialog box Text in dialog box User options and descriptions I
137. ce or paper handling Minimum size width by height Maximum size width by height accessory Tray 1 multipurpose 98 mm by 191 mm 312 mm by 470 mm 3 9 inches by 7 5 inches 12 28 inches by 18 46 inches Tray 2 148 mm by 210 mm 297 mm by 432 mm 3 9 inches by 7 5 inches 11 7 inches by 17 0 inches Tray 3 148 mm by 210 mm 297 mm by 432 mm 3 9 inches by 7 5 inches 11 7 inches by 17 0 inches 500 sheet stapler stacker face up bin 98 mm by 191 mm 312 mm by 470 mm INE ganas 78 none 1228 mehes by 18 48 nbs 1 500 sheet stapler stacker face down bin 148 mm by 210 mm 312 mm by 470 mm Tray 4 148 mm by 210 mm 297 mm by 432 mm tJ 17 menesty 17 0 mehes Paper and envelope icons The paper and envelope icons visually define width and height i i i Duplex printing accessory 98 mm by 191 mm 312 mm by 470 mm 8 9 inches by 7 5 inches 12 28 inches by 18 46 inches i i Measurement Units button Like the dynamic command button previously described the Measurement Units button is also multititled although its function is always to toggle the unit of measurement between standard inches and metric millimeters units of measurement Software Technical Reference Driver features 75 Close button The Close button closes the Custom Paper Size dialog box according to the logic in the following table In all cases any custom paper sizes that are successfully saved and not renamed or deleted while the dialog box
138. cking the filename READ4200 RTF for the HP LaserJet 4200 printer and READ4300 RTF for the HP LaserJet 4300 printer When you have the file open in Notepad you can click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to another location Software description Software Technical Reference HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 printing system release notes The Hewlett Packard LaserJet 4200 and 4300 Printing System Release notes late breaking information and other technical assistance are available at the following Web sites http www hp com support j4200 http www hp com support j4300 Bidirectional communication Bidirectional communication is the printer s ability to respond to data inquiries from the computer and report back information such as what type of print media is available or what accessories are connected to the printer If a printer does not have this capability that is if it has no bidirectional mode it can only accept commands from the host and cannot report information back Driver Autoconfiguration and Printer Status and Alerts use bidirectional communications software The Typical Installation installs Driver Autoconfiguration in supported environments that contain the bidirectional communication software Use Custom Installation when you do not want these features Bidirectional communication depends on the operating system on which your network runs and on the type of connection you have between your computer and
139. click Delete Software Technical Reference Driver features 67 Note You can have no more that 30 watermarks in the Current Watermarks list at one time When the limit of 30 watermarks is reached the New button is disabled and a Bubble Help appears that explains why the button is disabled and how to enable it To edit an existing watermark select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list If you change the Watermark Message for that watermark you are in effect creating a new watermark Watermark message The Watermark Message is also the name that identifies the watermark in the Current Watermarks list except when more than one watermark has the same message For example you might want several different watermarks with the message DRAFT each with a different font or size When this occurs the string is appended with a space a pound sign and a number for example Draft 2 When a number is added the number two is used first but if the resulting name is also in the list then the number increases until the name is unique Message angle Use the controls in the Message Angle group box to print the watermark in a diagonal horizontal or angle custom orientation to the page s text The default is Diagonal All three settings automatically center the watermark string within the page the selection of a particular setting affects only the angle of the string placement Diagonal places the text along a line that spans the lower left to upp
140. client workstations remotely With DMC customized printer settings can be retained during driver updates rather than be replaced with the default settings of the new driver The process of configuring drivers and other software occurs before installation In this way the software can be configured once and installed on any number of server or client systems The driver configuration information is stored in a file that is separate from the standard driver files dynamic link libraries DLLs for rendering and presenting a user interface but that is included in the driver package and referenced in the driver INF file The configuration process involves reading the default information from this file and allowing an administrator to select new default settings for existing features The file is then saved and used when the associated driver is installed Network administrators use the driver management and configuration solution to preconfigure a printer driver before deployment and installation within an operating environment It is most beneficial when configuring printer drivers for multiple workstations and printers that share the same configuration Two classes of features can be configured printer accessories and driver feature settings Use this solution to configure the driver to match the printer hardware so that access to all of the printer accessories through the driver is enabled appropriately for example for duplexing units and additional
141. crine C Bindery Netware 3 x lt Back Next gt Cannel Figure 89 NDS Login Authenticator dialog box Click Bindery NetWare 3 x to install the bindery mode Note In the bindery mode any functionality associated with NDS connectivity is lost To determine whether a workstation client has been previously loaded as bindery or NDS do the following 1 Co Right click the Novell N Icon in the taskbar or Click Start click Programs click Novell and then click Novell login Click NetWare Login Click Advanced to expand the window The first tab reads Bindery or NDS depending on the installation Setting up an NDS installed client to operate in bindery emulation mode Internal Note These instructions apply to Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP with slight variations in the appearance of the menus Right click the red N icon in the system tray In the menu that appears click Novell Client Properties A menu titled Novell Client Configuration appears Click the Location Profiles tab Type Bindery into the New Location Profile field and then click Add Do not type the quotation marks The word Bindery is not case sensitive into Software Technical Reference Engineering Detail 209 Novell Client Configuration Figure 90 Novell Client Configuration dialog box 5 The Location Profile Properties Bindery dialog box appears Click the S
142. cted 1 Printer Status and Alerts will activate display itself when low toner has been ow toner a m erroralert Printer Status and Alerts will notactivate display itself when an error has mem 1 Printer Status and Alerts will activate display itself when an error has been menm n Default values after installation refreshrate The keys in this section are specific to each printer or all printers The value for each printer indicates the update interval for which status will query the printer for the state of the print job or device alerts Note In versions of Printer Status and Alerts earlier than 2 3 the Status check rate was referred to as the Refresh rate in the Printer Status and Alerts user interface Table 98 refreshrate section hidden The hidden key controls whether or not the Status check rate panel should appear within the Printer Status and Alerts options This entry may be useful for administrators who do not want to let end users control the Status check rate setting because of the negative impact on network performance See the LegacyPrinterDSRates section for more information about the Status check rate intervals Do not hide the Status check rate panel 234 Engineering Detail Software Technical Reference KeyName VWaueq 1 Hide the Status Check Rate panel within the Printer Status and Alerts Options So that users cannot change the status c
143. ctional communication query occurs If bidirectional communication is working the information returned will be used to update the list of paper types If bidirectional communication is not working the driver will look for any custom paper types that it might have saved from a previous bidirectional communication query and use those Otherwise no custom paper types will be accessible through the driver The standard types that appear in the lists are e Bond e Cardstock gt 164 g m2 e Envelope e Labels e Letterhead e Plain e Preprinted e e Recycled e Rough e Transparency e Unspecified Software Technical Reference Driver features 103 Print Quality For the HP LaserJet PCL 6 driver the Print Quality group box contains the following resolution options e ProRes 1200 180 e ProRes 1200 212 e FastRes 1200 Faster e 600 dpi FastRes 1200 Faster is the default setting For the HP LaserJet PCL 5e driver the Print Quality group box contains the following resolution options e 600 dpi e 300 dpi 300 dpi is the default setting For the HP LaserJet PS driver the Print Quality group box contains the following resolution options e ProRes 1200 Best e FastRes 1200 Faster e 600 dpi FastRes 1200 Faster is the default setting EconoMode Use the EconoMode check box to turn this toner saving feature on and off independently of the other Print Quality tab settings Whe
144. d The field temporarily accepts fewer than four digits in the string but when the edit field loses focus the zeroes pad the left end of the PIN until it contains exactly four digits The default initialized value for the PIN is 0000 for Private Job and Stored Job with Require PIN to Print selected Private Job Use this option to send a print job directly to the printer memory Selecting Private Job activates the PIN field The print job can be printed only after you type a PIN at the printer control panel After the job is printed the printer removes the job from the printer memory This feature is useful when you are printing sensitive or confidential documents that you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing Private Job stores the print job on the hard disk After it is released for printing the private job is immediately deleted from the printer If more copies are needed you will have to reprint the job from the software program If you send a second private job to the printer that has the same user name and job name as an existing private job and if you have not released the original job for printing the second job will overwrite the older job regardless of the PIN Private jobs are deleted if power to the printer is interrupted Stored Job Note 96 Use Stored Job to send a print job directly to the printer hard disk The print job is stored in the printer as if it is an electronic file cabinet After the print job i
145. d Job If selected you must enter a PIN to make the stored job private A private stored job is not the same as a private job see above Private jobs are deleted from the printer memory after they are printed Private stored jobs are retained in the printer memory after printing but require that a PIN be typed each time they are printed Document Identifiers used in Job Storage When you use a Job Storage feature your document is identified in the printer control panel by user name and job name User Name The User Name edit box allows you to identify the job at the printer control panel When the driver is first this string initializes to the empty string but the dialog box detects this condition and replaces the string with your login name in Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP The following describes the restrictions for the User Name field Job Name The Job Name is used for specifying a name to identify the job on the printer control panel When the driver is installed this string is initialized to the empty string but the dialog box will detect this condition and replace the string with Untitled The following describes the restrictions for the Job Name field The Job Name and the User Name fields can contain no more than 16 characters each and are limited to A through Z and 0 through 9 because the name is displayed on the printer control panel If you try to enter a lo
146. d on the printer This can take about five minutes Let the process finish without further interaction with the printer or computer ON DOO A The printer automatically power cycles off and on again to activate the update Remote firmware update using the TCP IP address and PORT1 1 Open a browser window 2 Inthe address line of the browser type without the arrow brackets lt ftp lt IPaddress gt where lt IPaddress gt is the TCP IP address of your printer 3 Open Windows Explorer window and locate the rfu file for your printer 4 Drag and drop the RFU file onto the PORT1 icon in the browser window Software Technical Reference Software description 43 Remote firmware update using and browser 3 4 Open a browser window In the address line of the browser type without the arrow brackets ftp lt IPaddress gt where lt IPaddress gt is the TCP IP address of your printer Open a Windows Explorer window and locate the rfu file for your printer Drag and drop the RFU file onto the PORT1 icon in the browser window Using HP Web JetAdmin to download the firmware to the printer This procedure requires that HP Web JetAdmin version 6 5 or later be installed Complete the following steps to update a single printer through HP Web JetAdmin after downloading the RFU file from the HP Web site 9 Start HP Web JetAdmin Type the TCP IP address or IP hostname of the printer in the Quick Device
147. d the Watermark Details dialog box appears Watermark Details 12 Current Watermarks Confidential Draft SAMPLE 8 5 by 11 inches New Delete Eont Attributes Watermark Message Name Color EHE 7 m Message Angle Shading Diagonal Very Light Im Horizontal Size Style Angle 52 fi 50 Regular OK Cancel Help Figure 19 Watermark details The dialog box shows a preview image and provides options for creating a new watermark and controlling the message angle and font attributes Click OK to accept all changes that are made in the Watermark Details dialog box However clicking Cancel does not cancel all changes If you make changes to a watermark and then select a different watermark or click New all changes made to the previous watermark are saved and only the current unsaved changes can be canceled Current watermarks The Current Watermarks group box contains a list of available watermarks both predefined watermarks made available in the driver and any new watermarks you have created To create a new watermark click New The new watermark appears in the Current Watermarks list and in the Watermark Message edit box as Untitled until you name it To name the new watermark type the selected watermark text in the Watermark Message edit box To delete a watermark select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list and
148. de a full featured Help system to provide assistance with printing and configuration options What s this Help In Windows 2000 and Windows What s this Help is supported You can gain access to What s this Help messages in any of the following ways e Right click a control and click What s this and a pop up Help window appears e Click the button at the upper right corner of the frame next to the X to change the cursor to an arrow with a question mark Use this special cursor to select a control and the pop up Help window for that feature appears Software Technical Reference Driver features 97 e Press the F1 key and the Help window for the currently selected control appears Context sensitive Help Press the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box and context sensitive Help appears Constraint messages Constraint messages are unsolicited messages that appear in response to specific actions you take These messages alert you to selections that are illogical or impossible given the capabilities of the printer or the current settings of other controls For example if you click Print on Both Sides and then change the paper type to transparencies a message appears asking you to resolve this conflict Feature Tip x 4 use this feature turn off the Print Document On option see Effects tab Figure 34 A typical constraint message with an OK button Whenever a constraint message appears wit
149. dentify Printer Select the network printer you want to If you identify the printer by selecting from the install Printers on your local network If your printer is not found on the list click Refresh or go back and click Specify a printer by address OR Specify the network printer you want to install Specify by Hardware Address option button IP Address option button IP Hostname option button IPX Address option button Description list and your HP LaserJet printer appears in the list and is selected Next takes you to the Set Network Communication Mode dialog box If your HP LaserJet 4200 or 4300 series printer is not found on the network click Refresh or go back to the Network Printer Configuration dialog box to specify the device by address Refresh updates the list of network printers If you identify the printer by specifying a specific network address Next takes you to the Set Network Communication Mode dialog box Back returns you to the Network Printer Configuration dialog box Cancel takes you to the Exit Setup dialog box Specify Network Path Type the network path or the queue name of your printer If you don t know its name click Browse to view available network printers Network path or queue name ooo invent Browse 152 Installing Windows printing system components Software Technical Reference Figure 59 Specify Ne
150. driver key and go to For all operating systems For Windows NT 4 0 1 Atthe command prompt type net stop spooler 2 Inthe registry editor select the Windows NT x86 Drivers Version 2 key 3 Selectthe first driver key and go to For all operating systems For Windows 2000 and Windows XP 1 Complete Windows NT 4 0 steps 1 through 3 but do not restart the system until all of these Windows 2000 and Windows XP steps have been completed 2 Inthe registry editor select the Windows NT x86 Drivers Wersion 3 key 3 Selectthe first driver key and got to For all operating systems For all operating systems 1 Ifa value named RealDriver exists right click the driver value and click Delete Then right click on the RealDriver value and click Rename Rename the RealDriver value to be Driver 2 fnovalue named RealDriver exists proceed to the next step 3 Selectthe next driver model name key in the registry and repeat steps 1 and 2 until each one has been inspected 4 Restart the system Printer Status and Alerts is conflicting with other program s If Printer Status and Alerts is conflicting with another program and you want to remove Printer Status and Alerts manually then follow these steps 1 command prompt window Software Technical Reference Engineering Detail 245 2 Change directories so that the current directory is the windows system directory For Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows Me systems it will typically be
151. e t 174 IiStallatiOn E 174 f ERE 174 Sudan 174 Screen fonts Mac OS ClasslC datu e peine ta 175 Font Suppo TEE 175 Installing the Macintosh printing aaa AARNA A ANRE KE 178 To install the HP LaserJet printer software for Macintosh 6 178 To set up a USB direct printer connection with Mac OS 8 6 9 1 178 To set up an AppleTalk networked printer with Mac OS 8 6 9 1 179 To set up a printer with 5 2 179 Uninstalling the Macintosh printing 179 disk 179 Folders and files added through installation of the HP LaserJet software Macintosh OS 179 Macintosh Macintosh OS Classic 180 Main Install dialog box sequence ssssssssssssesseeeeeeeenneee enne sn 180 Printer setup using AppleTalk 8 184 HP LaserJet Screen Fonts Installer dialog box 185 Macintosh Macintosh OS X installation sssessssssssssssseeene eene
152. e Click the Continue button to go to the third screen in this sequence Click the Exit button to open the Exiting Registration dialog box Type the date you purchased your Hewlett Packard printer Type the printer s serial number Installing Windows printing system components 165 Title of dialog box Text in dialog box User options and descriptions The questions about the number of employees and your job responsibility appear only if you answered that you will use your Hewlett Packard 4200 or 4300 series printer primarily for business or telecommuting Drop down boxes with possible answers are provided for your convenience Answering these questions is optional in the registration process Hewlett Packard s Electronic Registration k x Please send your registration to CA Hewlett Packard via e mail invent E mail Figure 72 Hewlett Packard s Electronic Registration dialog box 3 of 3 Table 67 Hewlett Packard s Electronic Registration dialog box text strings 3 of 3 Title of dialog box Text in dialog box User options and descriptions Hewlett Packard s Electronic Please send your registration to Click the E mail button to send an Registration Hewlett Packard via e mail e mail to HP that contains the E mail button default option registration information you specified A thank you screen Previous bution appears when the e mail is sent Exit button 166 Installing Windows print
153. e e registration by e mail Note Web registration for Hebrew and Arabic is in English To gain access to the product registration options go to the main menu of the HP LaserJet software CD ROM browser and click Register Product This starts the HP WebReg utility and opens the following window Hewlett Packard s Electronic Registration D Thank you for purchasing your new Hewlett Packard Printer invent Welcome to HP s registration This information is confidential and for HP registration purposes only This is the fastest and easiest way for you to join our select group of HP owners who register to receive Directto you details on Technical support updates Ideas and ways to use your new HP printer Other exciting HP products News on emerging technologies If you have internet access and would like to register via our World Wide Web registration page click here WWW Registration Ifyou do not have internet access or would rather register via email please click here to continue with Hewlett Packard s Electronic Registration Exit Electronic Registration Figure 68 Hewlett Packard s Electronic Registration dialog box Table 63 Hewlett Packard s Electronic Registration text strings Title of dialog box Text in dialog box User options and descriptions Hewlett Packard s Electronic Welcome to HP s registration This Click the WWW Registration Registration information is confidential and for button
154. e a link to the HP Web site http www hp com go webjetadmin to download the latest version of the HP Web JetAdmin software Click Optional Software from the CD ROM browser and then click HP Web JetAdmin HP Web JetAdmin is available for the following network operating environments e Microsoft Windows 2000 e Microsoft Windows NT 4 0 Red Hat Linux 7 1 e SuSE Linux 7 1 Software Technical Reference Software description 51 52 Software description Software Technical Reference Driver features Introduction This chapter describes the features of the following drivers for supported operating systems for the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers e PCL 5e and PCL 6 drivers for Windows 95 Windows 99 Windows and Windows NT 4 0 e PCL 5e and PCL 6 drivers for Windows 2000 and Windows e PostScript driver e Structure and availability of the printing system software CD ROM PCL 5e PCL 6 driver features for Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me and Windows NT 4 0 This section describes the options that are available on each tab of the PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver interfaces Help system The HP LaserJet PCL 6 and PCL 5e drivers include a full featured Help system to provide assistance with printing and configuration options What s this Help In Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP What s this Help is supported You can gain access to What s this Help messages in any o
155. e check box during a Custom Installation The guide is installed in the Manuals folder on the target system You can also choose to install the guides later or to read the guide on the printing system software CD ROM by navigating to lt language gt Manuals In accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act ADA Hewlett Packard provides readable onscreen versions of the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 User Guide at the following HP Web sites http www hp com support lj4200 http www hp com support lj4300 Hyperlinked screen readable versions of the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 User Guide is available on the printer software CD ROM To view the user guide navigate to the English folder and then to the Manuals folder There open HP4200EN CHM or HP4300EN CHM HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printing system installation notes 26 The HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 Series Printing System Installation Notes are available on the HP LaserJet software CD ROM The installation notes filename READ4200 RTF for the HP LaserJet 4200 printer and READ4300 rtf for the HP LaserJet 4300 printer contain important information about printer features instructions for installing the printing system software and technical assistance To view this text file from the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 software CD ROMs click View Documentation and then click Readme You can also gain access to the file by inserting the CD ROM navigating to LANGUAGE and then cli
156. e choices computer system language and OK button presents this choice as the default You can select another language available on the CD ROM by clicking the down arrow of the drop down menu Cancel button Click OK to initiate the printing system setup Click Cancel to go to the Exit Setup dialog box Next the Setup dialog box appears HP LaserJet Setup is preparing the InstallShield A Wizard which will quide you through the rest of the setup process Please wait Figure 49 Setup dialog box Note While the Setup dialog box appears the installer is decompressing files into the system Temp a directory The elapsed time to complete this action depends upon the performance of the system Table 45 Setup dialog box text strings itle of dialog box Text in dialog box User options and descriptions Setup HP LaserJet 4200 or HP LaserJet 4300 No user options This is an information Series Printing System Setup is preparing only dialog box the InstallShield R Wizard that will guide you through the rest of the setup process Please wait Software Technical Reference Installing Windows printing system components 143 x Welcome to the hp LaserJet 4200 Setup Wizard It is strongly recommended that you close all other applications before running this Setup wizard O Before continuing refer to the Setup poster and make any required connections invent Click Next to continue Copyri
157. e fonts Graphics Mode for PCL 5e There are two settings under Graphics Mode on the PCL 5e driver only that control the way in which the driver expresses vector graphics on a page e Select Send Graphics as Vector to send graphics to the printer as a combination of HP GL2 and raster images This setting may produce higher quality graphics output e Select Send Graphics as Raster to send all graphics to the printer as images composed of individual dots This setting may improve printing speed in some cases Software Technical Reference Driver features 101 Paper Quality tab features The Paper Quality tab allows you to specify the size type and source of your print media together with Print Quality settings You may also indicate paper selection choices for the first page of the document that are different from the choices for the other pages The Paper Quality tab is shown in the following illustration amp hp LaserJet 4200 PCL 6 Printing Preferences 4 21 Layout Paper Quality Finishina Effects Destination Paper Options Use different paper Other Pages Back Cover Source is Automaticall Select 7 y Print Quality Type is Unspecified v ProRes 1200 180 Ipi EconoMode Saves Print Cartridges Help OK Cancel Aooly Figure 37 The default appearance of the Paper Quality tab Paper Options The following settings are available in the P
158. e in Microsoft Windows environments You can choose to install the software by using either a Typical Installation or a Custom Installation Typical Installation dialog box sequence Note The dialog boxes shown here appear in the Windows NT 4 0 installation sequence The order and appearance of dialog boxes can vary among operating systems The Typical Installation includes the following components e LaserJet PCL 6 driver e Screen fonts Driver Autoconfiguration in environments that support bidirectional communication This option will not appear in unsupported bidirectional communications environments Note The components of a typical installation might vary from printer to printer When you select the Install Printer option from the HP LaserJet software CD ROM browser the Choose Setup Language dialog box appears This dialog box does not appear when the setup language is Hebrew or Arabic Choose Setup Language Select the lanquage for this installation from the choices below 142 Installing Windows printing system components Software Technical Reference Figure 48 Choose Setup Language dialog box Note The Choose Setup Language dialog box lists only the languages available on the particular HP LaserJet software CD ROM you are using Table 44 Choose Setup Language dialog box text strings Choose Setup Language Select the language for this The installer automatically detects your installation from following th
159. e print driver on your computer is not yet configured to use the hard disk follow these steps Note These steps must be completed for each driver 1 Double click the My Computer icon This opens the My Computer window 2 Openthe Printers window 78 Driver features Software Technical Reference Right click the printer icon This opens drop down menu Click Properties The Properties dialog box appears Click the Configure tab Under Other Options click More Under Storage click the Printer Hard Disk check box This also selects Job Storage Enabled Close all of the dialog boxes by clicking OK Your PCL printer driver is now configured to use the hard disk and Job Storage features of your HP LaserJet 4200 or 4300 series printer ON DOO FR C Job Storage modes Using the Job Storage feature on the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers you can store documents at the printer and then control the printing of these documents at the printer control panel This feature is intended to provide greater flexibility convenience security and cost savings After the Job Storage feature has been enabled you can use its features by clicking Settings on the Destination tab of the printer driver The HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers offer the following Job Storage options Off This option turns the Job Storage feature off it is disabled which means that the print job will not be stored in the printer Quick Copy
160. e the print driver Note This section outlines the procedures for installing print drivers with Point and Print If these procedures not successful contact Microsoft Hewlett Packard provides drivers that are compatible with the Point and Print feature but this is a function of the Microsoft operating systems not of HP print drivers Windows NT Windows 2000 and Windows XP drivers from HP are supported only on Intel X86 R processor types Any other processor types must use Windows NT drivers from Microsoft To install the printer driver on a Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP server you must have administrator privileges To completely install the Windows NT 4 0 printer driver on the Windows NT 4 0 server or the Windows 2000 printer driver on the Windows 2000 server you must have administrator privileges on the server The Windows NT 4 0 Printer INF file or the Windows 2000 Printer INF file must contain the same printer name as the Windows 95 Windows 98 or Windows Me printer INF file Point and Print installation of a PS driver is supported only with a Microsoft Windows 95 Windows 98 or Windows Me PS driver version 4 0 or later For all operating systems use the Add Printer Wizard to install the appropriate operating system driver on the server and client machines as shown in the following table Table 69 Windows servers with Windows clients Computerfunctionf SSCS Server and clients 1 Click Start click Set
161. e the same as for First Page First Page Other Pages Back Cover All pages after the first page will print using this source Source is Auto Select Unspecified Back Figure 21 Other Pages mini tab Cover Use this feature to include a blank back cover on a document or include a back cover from a paper source different from that used for the remainder of the document Use the Back Cover mini tab to select an alternative media source or the same source as First Page from which a blank page is drawn and placed after the final page of the body of the document The mini tab contains three option buttons and two drop down menus Three option buttons are available e back cover default e Use the first page source e Use an alternate source The two drop down menus become available when Use an alternate source is selected e Source is default e is Software Technical Reference Driver features 71 No back cover is selected as the default with the drop down Source is is selection boxes disabled Clicking Use an alternate source activates the drop down menus The drop down menu value defaults to the same source as that chosen for the First Page mini tab Clicking Use the first page source changes the drop down value to match the first page if necessary but the drop down menus remain inactive When the Back Cover mini tab is active clicking No back cover deact
162. ears when Job Storage is enabled on the Device Settings tab All of the options appear if a hard disk is installed on the printer and enabled on the Device Settings tab Off This option turns the Job Storage feature off it is disabled which means that the print job will not be stored in the printer Proof and Hold Use this option to store the print job on the printer hard disk and print only the first copy of the job You can check the first copy and if the document is correct you can print the remaining copies of the print job at the printer control panel The number of proof and hold print jobs that can be stored in the printer is set at the printer control panel Private Job and Stored Job The Private Job and Stored Job options can be secured by using a four digit personal identification number PIN Software Technical Reference Driver features 95 You can assign a four digit PIN to print job when you using the Private Job or Stored Job feature This number must be typed at the printer control panel before the job can be printed The box labeled PIN is usually inactive Selecting Private Job or Stored Job along with Require PIN to Print activates the PIN box The Stored Job PIN coupling has a PIN restriction of four ASCII numeric characters ASCII 0 30 through 0 39 If you type non numeric characters they are removed immediately If you type more than four characters the characters after the fourth are truncate
163. eatures Windows XP 64 amp 32 Windows 2000 Windows NT 40 Windows 95 98 Me Mac OS2 Pos POLS Ps Poef PcLs PS PCLS PS PS 22756 e ce mes sepe ee pe Pitoy X I x I X x x x x _ Print controls Table 32 Driver support for print controls ar Windows 64 amp 32 Windows Windows NT 4 0 Windows 95 98 2000 roe Pos Ps Pog POL PS 8 PS PS PS Raster compression X x x x x x 130 Driver features Software Technical Reference Windows 64 amp 32 Windows Windows NT 4 0 Windows 95 98 NEN ame ood ee ee Use HP MEt use mwememy PCL6 standard enhanced Resolution ProRes 1200 180 Resolution ProRes 1200 212 Ipi Resolution 600 X X X X X X X X XIXI X Resolution 300 X Manually print on 2nd side Photo paper printing RET Scale patterns WYSIWYG General device font support Hebrew Greek Arabic Cyrillic device fonts Font DIMM on X Send TrueType as bitmaps TrueType fonts Levels of gray Edge to edge Print text as black CYMK inks Print in grayscale Text neutral grays Text halftone Graphics neutral grays Graphics halftone Photographs neutral grays Photographs halftones Color edge control Color rendering RGB device Alienation Better mobile printing gt lt
164. ect one of the Job Storage options described above by clicking the appropriate option button lt 0 Note These instructions are specific to the Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP environments when using the latest available PCL 5 and PCL 6 drivers While the basic concepts of Job Storage are the same for PS print jobs there are significant differences in the driver user interface Also there are some limitations in naming and PIN selection Releasing stored jobs at the printer Once you send a print job using Job Storage you can release the job to print at the printer control panel 1 Press the select button the one with the check mark to open the menus 2 Pressthe up and down buttons to scroll to RETRIEVE JOB and then press the select button 3 Pressthe up and down buttons to scroll to your job and then press the select button 4 Press the up and down buttons to scroll to PRINT The PRINT selection might have an icon next to it indicating that the job is locked If so type the PIN number and then press the select button Press the select button Deleting a print job Sometimes it is necessary to delete a print job from the printer memory or hard disk This can be done at the printer control panel 1 Press the Menu button to open the menus 2 Pressthe up and down buttons to scroll to RETRIEVE JOB 3 Pressthe up and down buttons to scroll to your job name and then pre
165. ed and a Bubble Help appears that explains why the button is disabled and how to enable it To edit an existing watermark select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list If you change the Watermark Message for that watermark you are in effect creating a new watermark Watermark Message The Watermark Message is also the name that identifies the watermark in the Current Watermarks list except when more than one watermark has the same message For example you might want several different watermarks with the message DRAFT each with a different font or size When this occurs the string is appended with a space a pound sign and a number for example Draft 2 When a number is added the number two is used first but if the resulting name is also in the list then the number increases until the name is unique Message Angle Use the controls in the Message Angle group box to print the watermark in a diagonal horizontal or angle custom orientation to the page s text The default is Diagonal All three settings automatically center the watermark string within the page the selection of a particular setting affects only the angle of the string placement Diagonal places the text along a line that spans the lower left to upper right corners of the page Font Attributes Name Color Use controls in the Font Attributes group box to change the font and the color shading size and style of the font The Name drop down menu lists Tr
166. edia For example a printer may have difficulty fusing toner near the trailing edge of an envelope To correct this problem rotate the media 180 degrees in the paper tray and select the Rotate by 180 degrees check box Stapling Options The Stapling Options group box is visible when the Accessory Output Bin setting on the Device Settings tab is HP 500 Sheet Stacker Stapler Use the Paper Size option in the Advanced window of the Layout tab to select the media size Stapling a document 1 Click File click Print and then click Properties 2 Click the Finishing tab 3 Select the One Staple Angled in the Stapling Options drop down menu Stapling options may be disabled by any of the following conflicts staple unit does not support the paper size stapling unit does not handle certain media types For example Transparency Cardstock or Labels Effects tab features The Effects tab is used to create unique paper effects such as scaling and watermarks amp hp LaserJet 4200 PCL 6 Printing Preferences E 7 Layout Paper Quality Finishing Effects Destination Fit to Page Print Document On Iv Scale to Fit E 00 of Normal Size E Watermarks none v First Page Only Edit Help OK Cancel amp oolu 108 Driver features Software Technical Reference Figure 41 Effects tab Print Document On setting Use Print Document On to form
167. edia attributes Printer image The bitmap image in the lower right portion of the Paper tab screen represents the current physical configuration of the printer according to the driver configuration data obtained automatically through bidirectional communication or configured manually through the driver It should have the same appearance as the image in the same location on the Destination tab and the Configure tab On the Paper tab the printer image contains hot spots for selecting a media source When the pointer moves over a hot spot the arrow reverts to the gloved hand used in the Bubble Help the preview image and other areas The current media source is highlighted in a bright green color on the printer bitmap Destination tab features The Destination tab provides options for job storage and output bins Note The Destination tab appears only if the Printer Hard Disk and Job Storage Enabled check boxes are selected To select these options click the Configure tab The printer image in the lower right portion of the Destination tab represents the current physical configuration of the printer and corresponds to its configuration data either obtained automatically through bidirectional communication or configured manually It should look the same as the image that appears in the same location on the Paper tab and the Configure tab Note The printer image shown in the illustration might differ from your HP La
168. eference Engineering Detail 241 Solution s Description of Solution s 1 Choose the Start Run menu and type notepad 2 When notepad opens choose the File Open menu and browse to the windows directory and select the file HPSTATUS INI 3 In the HPSTATUS INI file locate the refreshrate section and set the allprinters entry equal to 0 zero 4 Save the file and exit Notepad 5 The change will take effect for the next print job You do not want Printer Status Click the Options Icon and then Setting the Status check rate and Alerts to track job status or click Next so that the Status option to Never disables print job show device status for a specific check rate option appears the tracking for the specific printer but printer but you do want to see right panel Select the specific still allows you to select the printer the device status for that printer printer in the For list and then icon to get device status move the slider to the far left In the event that the administrator pointing to Never has hidden the Status check rate option and you cannot see this option complete the following steps 1 Choose the Start Run menu and type notepad 2 When Notepad opens choose the File Open menu and browse to the Windows directory and select the file HPSTATUS INI 3 In the HPSTATUS INI file locate the refreshrate section Create a new entry with the exact name of the printer and set it equal
169. emoved To start status manually select the Start Run menu and type HPSTATUS Disabling Job Tracking To temporarily disable job tracking for one or more printers available in Printer Status and Alerts click the Options icon In the Options panel select Status check rate Move the slider control all the way to the left so that it is pointing to Never Adding or removing Printer Status and Alerts printers Printer Status and Alerts determines which drivers it supports and which ones it does not by consulting the driver support matrix file HPSASDRV MTX If a printer is known to be supported but does not appear in the Printer Status and Alerts window within 5 minutes of Printer Status and Alerts start up you can run a command to enable Printer Status and Alerts support for the driver that the printer uses Caution Be careful when you add a driver to the Printer Status and Alerts supported list because it might be unsupported for a reason Adding support for a driver that has not been tested and is not supported might interrupt printing for the specified driver or for the entire printing system Adding support for a specific driver 1 Open a command prompt window 2 Change directories so that the current directory is the windows system directory For Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows Me operating systems it will typically be windows system for Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP systems it will be winnt system32 3 Ma
170. en dialog 185 HP LaserJet Screen Fonts installer dialog 2 400000 186 Installation was successful dialog enne 186 HP LaserJet for Macintosh installer splash screen dialog box 187 HP LaserJet Installer dialog box easy install 188 HP LaserJet Installer dialog box custom install 2 189 Installing dialog 0 2 4 4 nennen nennen rrr nennen rrr enne nns 190 Installation was successful dialog 190 NDS Login Authenticator dialog box 209 Novell Client Configuration dialog box essseeeeeeeeneeneenneenn nnns 210 Location Profile Properties Bindery dialog box 211 Software Technical Reference Figure 92 Figure 93 Figure 94 Figure 95 Figure 96 Figure 97 Figure 98 Figure 99 Figure 100 Figure 101 Figure 102 Figure 103 Figure 104 Figure 105 Figure 106 Figure 107 Figure 108 Figure 109 Figure 110 Figure 111 Novell Login dialog 4 4 212 Novell Client Configuration dialog 2 2 2 4 nens 213 HP JetAdmin Utility 214 Preferences dialog 215 New Device dia
171. ents Software Technical Reference Installation for Macintosh IBM OS 2 and Linux operating systems Introduction This section provides system requirements and procedures for installing and removing the HP LaserJet printing system software for supported operating system other than Windows It also provides information about font support and system modifications Supported operating systems include e Macintosh e IBMOS 2 e Linux System Requirements The following system requirements are for installing and using the HP LaserJet printing system software on each of these supported operating systems Macintosh e 68 kilobyte processor e Macintosh OS 8 6 or later e 16 MB RAM 20 available disk space IBM OS 2 e Pentium processor e 32 MB RAM required for OS 2 e 5 MB available disk space required for driver Linux For information about Linux support for the printer see the following Web sites http hp sourceforge net HP Linux support home page http www hp com go linux Hewlett Packard s Linux Web site Software Technical Reference Installation for Macintosh IBM OS 2 and Linux operating systems 173 Macintosh Macintosh component descriptions The printer includes the following software for Macintosh computers PPDs Mac OS 8 6 to 9 x Mac OS X classic and Mac OS X HP LaserJet PPDs In Mac OS 8 6 to 9 x these PS printer definition files for HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers are i
172. er Fuenfes de pantalla Ekran Fontlari Ze 3 xk Figure 81 HP LaserJet Screen Fonts splash screen dialog box Table 77 HP LaserJet Screen Fonts splash screen dialog text strings Title of dialog box Text in dialog box User Options and Descriptions HP LaserJet Screen Fonts HP LaserJet Screen Fonts Click the Continue button to open the HP Continue button LaserJet Screen Fonts dialog box Software Technical Reference Installation for Macintosh IBM OS 2 and Linux operating systems 185 HF Laserjet screen Fonts Click the Install to install Srreemg Fonrs mcis li Less Bersa will ita ua Tec P gk P apple Eterna 03 Figure 82 HP LaserJet Screen Fonts installer dialog box Table 78 HP LaserJet Screen Fonts installer dialog text strings 1 of 2 Title of dialog box Text in dialog box User Options and Descriptions HP LaserJet Screen Fonts Click the Install button to install Click the Install button to start the Screen Fonts installation Items will be installed on the disk Click the Quit button to quit the Installer Apple External HD without making changes to the system Quit button Install button default option When you click Install an installation progress bar dialog box briefly appears The following table details the contents of that dialog box Table 79 HP LaserJet Screen Fonts installer dialog text strings 2 of 2 itle of dialog box Text in dialog bo
173. er files hpbdrvhk c My Printer Cleans the registry information and Printer Status and Alerts driver hooking information should any remnants be left behind This option should only be used if the hpbddrvhk u uninstall option fails after three consecutive attempts hpbdrvhk c a Use the a option to clean up all printer settings after the hpbdrvhk u a command has been run Printer Status and Alerts is causing problems with a specific driver model To resolve this issue perform the following steps 244 1 2 A 11 12 13 Open a command prompt window Change directories so that the current directory is the windows system directory For Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows Me systems it will typically be windows system for Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP systems it will be winnt system32 Make sure Printer Status and Alerts is closed If it is not right click the Printer Status and Alerts tray icon and click Exit Make sure that all other programs are closed Type the command hpbdrvhk r Name of the Printer Goes Type the command hpbdrvhk u Name of the Printer Goes Here Repeat step 5 and 6 for each printer name that references the driver model name and that is causing problems Restart the system Any printer that references the same driver model name is now no longer supported by Printer Status and Alerts If you are still experiencing problems with this driver or p
174. er for the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers that can then be copied to other media such as a local hard drive or a network drive Optional Software To increase productivity and get the most out of your HP LaserJet 4200 or 4300 series printer view a list of optional software available for installation The HP Web Jetadmin option is available for the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers Installer features 48 The common installer is designed to provide a simple and consistent installation method for the product line The common installer is available for the Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP operating systems The common installer offers the following features e HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 software CD ROM features an interactive software interface See HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 software CD ROMs for Windows systems e Acrobat Reader 5 0 is automatically installed Acrobat Reader 4 05 is installed for languages that read from right to left The installer is Web enabled providing access to the HP Web site for the latest software components and drivers e Network connection is integrated so that you can install drivers and connect to a network printer in a single process selection dialog box sets the operating system language as the default language for Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP only You can use the
175. er information 235 All Pages tab in drivers 70 Allow Scaling from Large Paper option in driver 88 Americans with Disabilities Act ADA compliance 26 AppleTalk 35 availability by operating system 124 availability of drivers and related software 124 autoconfiguration See Enterprise AutoConfiguration EAC Back Cover option in drivers 103 Back Cover tab in drivers 71 back to front printing 100 Basics tab in drivers 83 adding component files for Windows 95 98 and Me 200 adding component files for Windows NT 4 0 2000 and XP 197 availability by operating system 124 configuring timeout 237 description 27 driver support 127 driver UI controls 28 support in various operating systems 27 bidirectional protocol level 237 bindery connection in Novell NetWare operating systems 208 bindery emulation mode 209 binding options in drivers 59 accessory output options 119 Index custom sizes 75 output options 117 bins driver options 81 bitmap screen fonts supported for Macintosh operating systems 175 bitmaps converted from TrueType 64 black printing all text as 64 Booklet Layout option in drivers 107 Booklet Printing option in drivers 59 borders option for pages in drivers 62 Bubble help 54 cartridges See print cartridges in box file layout 121 language versions 122 regional versions 122 character sets See fonts Citrix Terminal Server 25 collation settings 120 configuring for watermarks 112 color configuring for watermarks 68 ColorSync
176. er right corners of the page Font attributes Use controls in the Font Attributes group box to change the font and the color shading size and style of the font Name The Name drop down menu lists TrueType fonts that are currently installed on the system Color The Color drop down menu lists the fixed unalterable color choices for the watermark Gray is the only color option for the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers Shading The following range of shades is available from the Shading drop down menu e Lightest e Very Light Light e Medium Light e Medium e Medium Dark e Dark e Very Dark e Darkest These values represent the intensity of the gray that is used for the Color attribute 68 Driver features Software Technical Reference Size Font sizes from 1 to 999 points are available from the Size menu The default point size is language dependent The choice of regular bold italic and bold italic is available from the Style drop down menu Default settings The default settings for new watermarks are Arial R font Gray color Very Light shading 150points and Regular style The default settings for preset watermarks are Arial font Gray color Very Light shading and Bold style The default point size for preset watermarks is language dependent and varies Paper tab features Use the Paper tab to specify the size type and source of the media as well as to define a custom paper size If you want to you can indic
177. er size media 34 ppm 4 size media 4200 series 45 ppm letter size media 44 ppm 4 size media 4300 series 35 ppm letter size media 34 ppm 4 size media 4200 series 45 ppm letter size media 44 ppm 4 size media 4300 series Parallel connection Parallel connection HP Jetdirect 10 100Base TX print server card for network connection Purpose and scope one 100 sheet multipurpose tray tray 1 maximum paper size legal 216 mm by 356 mm 8 5 by 14 inches one 500 sheet tray tray 2 maximum paper size legal 216 mm by 356 mm 8 5 by 14 inches optional high capacity input 1 500 sheet tray one 100 sheet multipurpose tray tray 1 maximum paper size legal 216 mm by 356 mm 8 5 by 14 inches one 500 sheet tray tray 2 maximum paper size legal 216 mm by 356 mm 8 5 by 14 inches optional high capacity input 1 500 sheet tray 1200 dots per inch dpi ProRes 600 dpi dual beam scanner 12 000 page print cartridge 4200 series 18 000 page print cartridge 4300 series 1200 dpi ProRes 600 dpi dual beam scanner 12 000 page print cartridge 4200 series 18 000 page print cartridge 4300 series Software Technical Reference Speed Connectivity Paper handling Resolution and print cartridge tn model dtn model Memory 64 MB RAM expandable to 416 MB 4200 series 80 MB RAM expandable to 416 MB
178. ere a R EE EEE EAA 156 Printer Sharing dialog 157 Finish dialog doo MEM 158 Exit Setup dialog DOoxX Man aan ene 158 Components dialog box Custom 160 Hewlett Packard s Electronic Registration dialog box 161 Welcome to Hewlett Packard s Registration dialog 162 Hewlett Packard s Electronic Registration dialog box 1 of 3 163 Hewlett Packard s Electronic Registration dialog box 2 of 165 Hewlett Packard s Electronic Registration dialog box 3 of 166 Exiting registration dialog 167 HP LaserJet for Macintosh installer splash screen dialog box 180 HP LaserJet Installer dialog box easy 181 HP LaserJet Installer dialog box custom install 182 installing dialog DOX Ea e E es 183 Installation was successful dialog 183 Important dialog ance nid tete n teen n i de ra in e a d aa 184 How do select my printer dialog 184 HP LaserJet Screen Fonts splash scre
179. erence Engineering Detail 243 hpbdrvhk i My 8150 Install Printer Status and Alerts support for the specified printer If the driver model name used by this printer is supported then the printer will be supported by Printer Status and Alerts otherwise it will report back the following error message The driver used by My 8150 is not supported Command Line Option hpbdrvhk r My 9000 Removes the driver model name used by the specified printer from the driver support matrix This means that any other printer which uses the same driver model as the printer My 9000 will no longer be supported by Printer Status and Alerts hpbdrvhk x HP DeskJet Excludes the driver model name using the specified printer driver file from the driver support matrix This option is generally not needed but could be useful in a shared environment If an administrator discovers that Printer Status and Alerts is causing problems with a specific driver printer but works correctly with a newer version of the driver printer this option can then be run on one machine and then replicated to other machines This option records the printer driver file version for the driver model name used by the specified printer as an unsupported driver model If a new printer driver file with the same name and a newer version is released and is found to work with Printer Status and Alerts Printer Status and Alerts will support the printer using the newer driv
180. erface or when a print job is started Driver INF file requirements The changes required to make EAC work are of two kinds e adding bidirectional communication component files e adding mini installer files Software Technical Reference Engineering Detail 199 Adding bidirectional communication component files Whereas NT based platforms store and run printer drivers from their own directory Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows Me platforms store drivers in the System folder This causes problems for EAC because an HP Installer based bidirectional communication installation also exists in this directory You do not want to override any existing bidirectional communication files but to install a new copy and decide whether or not it will be used depending on what is already on the system For this reason all of the bidirectional communication specific files in the INF are uncompressed into temporary filenames by changing the last letter of the extension to a T The temporary names are mapped to the actual file names in the mini installer INI file and the mini installer itself determines what to do with any existing bidirectional communication on the system before using the version that came with the driver INF Changes CopyFiles HPBF4121 FILES AUTOCFG FILES HPAUTO FILES AUTOCFG FILES HPNRA EX HPNRA EXT HPBOID EX HPBOID EXT HPBPRO EX HPBPRO EXT HPPAPMLO EX HPPAPMLO EXT HPBNRAC2 DL HPBNRAC2 DLT HPBMIAPI DL HPBMI
181. eries printers This document is prepared in an electronic format to serve as a quick reference tool for Customer Care Center CCC agents support engineers system administrators management information systems MIS personnel and HP LaserJet printer end users as appropriate The following information is included in this technical reference e descriptions of drivers and platforms with system modifications e procedures for installing and uninstalling software components e descriptions of problems that can arise while using the printer and known solutions to those problems e descriptions of known software issues and workarounds The following table contains descriptions of the printer models described in this STR The printing system software for each printer model accommodates the differences between models Note Bundle configurations might vary among geographic regions Software Technical Reference Purpose and scope 19 HP LaserJet 4200 and HP LaserJet 4300 series printers Table 1 Features of the HP LaserJet 4200 and the HP LaserJet 4300 series printers Memory Speed Connectivity Paper handling Resolution and print cartridge Base model n model 20 48 megabytes MB Random Access Memory RAM expandable to 416 MB 4200 series 64 MB RAM expandable to 416 MB 4300 series 64 MB RAM expandable to 416 MB 4200 series 80 MB RAM expandable to 416 MB 4300 series 35 pages per minute ppm lett
182. ervices tab In the Services selection window click Login Service 210 Engineering Detail Software Technical Reference Location Profile Properties Bindery Services Service Name Service Instance Service Login Service Service Instance Bindery Add Proper cancel Figure 91 Location Profile Properties Bindery dialog box In the Service Instance field type Bindery without the quotation marks and then click Add In the Novell Login dialog box see the following illustration click the Bindery tab Software Technical Reference Engineering Detail 211 n Novell Login Novell Client Credentials NDS Bindery Seript Windows NT 2000 Dialup Active Authenticator Server Figure 92 Novell Login dialog box 8 Select the Active Authenticator check box 9 Click the icon to the right of the Server field to browse and select a default server Note A Wfthe Server field is left blank a server will have to be selected during the logon process 10 To exit click OK in this and subsequent windows until the Novell Client Configuration window appears as shown in the following illustration 11 Click the Advanced Login tab select the Location List check box and then select the Clear Connections check box 212 Engineering Detail Software Technical Reference Novell Client Configuration Single Sign on DHCP Settings Default Ca
183. es 129 Table 30 Driver support for job storage 130 Table 31 Driver support for custom preference storage recall features 130 Table 32 Driver support for print controls 130 Table 33 Driver support for watermarks feature 132 Table 34 Driver support for paper sizes sessssseeeeeeneen nennen nennen nennen 132 Table 35 Driver support for paper types 221 1 133 Table 36 Driver support for paper sources nme nnnm nnns 133 Table 37 Driver support for alternate source paper type feature 134 Table 38 Driver support for printing destination 134 Table 39 Driver support for installable 134 Table 40 Driver support for localization 134 Software Technical Reference Table 41 Table 42 Table 43 Table 44 Table 45 Table 46 Table 47 Table 48 Table 49 Table 50 Table 51 Table 52 Table 53 Table 54 Table 55 Table 56 Table 57 Table 58 Table 59 Table 60 Table 61 Table 62 Table 63 Table 64 Table 65 Table 66 Table 67 T
184. es a graphical icon resembling a cartoon speech bubble with a small i in it representing the international symbol for information The following illustration shows Bubble Help icons on a driver tab Fj hp LaserJet 4200 PCL 6 Properties 2 x Finishing Effects Paper Destination Basics Buick Sets Untitled Save Document Options Print on Both Sides oY Flip Pages Up Booklet Ranting 01 Y Staple m Print Quality 6 Best Quality i 4 Pages per Sheet Erg mons ro Faster Printing Borders Custom Details Paris EconoMode May Save Print Cartridg Right then Down Cancel Help Figure 11 A property page with Bubble Help icons The bubble typically appears next to a disabled control although it can also accompany an enabled control if there is an important note concerning its use Moving the pointer over the bubble changes the arrow to a gloved hand which indicates that the area underneath the pointer is selectable When the bubble is selected by using either the mouse or the keyboard a message box appears that contains a brief explanation about why the control is disabled and what can be done to enable it If the control is not disabled the message is a tip or a precaution to be aware of when using that particular feature The following table lists Bubble Help messages and the conditions that cause them to appear
185. es not affect graphic images on the page Print all Text as Black remains selected only for the current print job When the current print job is completed Print all Text as Black is automatically turned off Font Settings group box In the Font Settings group box the only available option is Send TrueType as Bitmaps which provides a safety net for programs that cannot easily use TrueType TM fonts for special graphic purposes such as shading rotation or slanting EconoMode Use the EconoMode check box to turn this toner saving feature on and off independently of the other Print Quality tab settings When this check box is selected the preview image lightens to show the expected appearance of the printed page when this feature is applied The option is off by default The EconoMode option can also be activated from the printer control panel The EconoMode setting on the Print Quality tab on or off overrides the setting on the printer control panel display as shown on the following table If an HP cartridge is not used EconoMode is not available regardless of the driver or control panel setting Table 11 EconoMode Settings Driver setting for print job ve GONG gt e ON a eren 1 Yes 9N ON Yes 0r ON 64 Driver features Software Technical Reference Effects tab features Use the Effects tab to create unique paper effects such as scaling and watermarks
186. ettings tab The driver determines whether the printer is capable of mopying by the presence of the Collate feature in a PPD GPD along with any constraints that may apply for example requiring that a hard disk be installed in the printer The driver automatically performs collation by checking the Collate check box in the program print dialog box If the printer is properly configured the printer performs the collation otherwise the spooler collates the print job Likewise if you clear the Collate check box in the program the copies will not be collated The following table shows the results of various driver Mopier Mode and collation settings Mopier mode and collation Table 17 Driver Mopier mode and collation settings Job Storage When the Job Storage setting in the Device Settings tab is enabled Job Storage appears as a feature on the Destination tab Printer Memory The amount of memory installed in the printer is established with this installable option The driver generates ranges of memory that may be installed up to the maximum that may be installed in the printer For the PS driver this setting established the value shown in the Available PostScript Memory installable option The driver can use this information to manage how the driver uses the printer memory 120 Driver features Software Technical Reference Form to Tray Assignment Form to Tray Assignment allows a network administrator to specify the paper size
187. f the following ways e Right click a control and click What s this and a pop up Help window appears e Click the button at the upper right corner of the frame next to the X to change the cursor to an arrow with a question mark Use this special cursor to select a control and the pop up Help window for that feature appears e Press the F1 key and the Help window for the currently selected control appears Context sensitive Help Press the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box and context sensitive Help appears Constraint messages Constraint messages are unsolicited messages that appear in response to specific actions you take These messages alert you to selections that are illogical or impossible given the capabilities of the printer or the current settings of other controls For example if you click Print on Both Sides and then change the paper type to transparencies a message appears asking you to resolve this conflict A typical constraint message with an OK button Software Technical Reference Driver features 53 Whenever constraint message appears with the or Cancel button the interpretation of the button is as follows e Clicking OK accepts the change that was just made and the driver then resets the conflicting control to a setting that is compatible with the new value e Clicking Cancel rejects the change that was just made returning the control to its previous value Bubble Help Bubble Help featur
188. fer from one driver to the next The installer section for a driver that is not EAC enabled looks something like this Installer Sections HPBF5111 PMD DataSectionz HPBF5111 DATA NON EAC Copy Sections Un Comment to Disable EAC CopyFileszHPBF5111 FILES LANGMON FILES EAC Copy Sections Comment to Disable EAC 3CopyFileszHPBF5111 FILESI LANGMON FILES AUTOCFG FILES HPAUTO FILES DataFile HPBF5111 PMD The lines in bold typeface show the required change The driver installed in this disabled case could result in no extra files that are copied to the driver directory and no AutoConfiguration is performed on that printer However if existing HP bidirectional communication software is installed and running on the target system the Update Now button is enabled and the user can invoke that functionality from the driver UI Media attributes This section includes the following information about media attributes e paper sources and destinations e paper tray configurations e paper source commands e media types and sizes e PCL 5e and PCL 6 custom paper sizes Paper sources and destinations The following table indicates the standard and optional paper sources and destinations for the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers Table 88 HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers paper sources and destinations Paper sources multipurpose tray tray 1 500 sheet paper tray tray 2 500 sheet paper tray tray 3 Paper des
189. first driver When the install window closes click Add and continue installing all the drivers for the different operating systems you will be using 8 Click OK and then click OK again 9 When you are finished click OK and then click Cancel The server is now set up to vend drivers automatically when workstations are associated with the shared printer Making NDPS print agents Internal Note A public access printer is not secure or controlled and is therefore not used in most cases 1 Return to the NWAdmin32 program 2 Highlight the root context object where you want to put the printer agent object 3 Using the menu click Object and then click Create 4 nthe Create Object window scroll down and click NDPSprinter 5 Type the name for the printer agent Example User1 printer2 PA and click Create 6 Inthe next window under the field labeled NDPS Manager Name click the small button to the right 7 Inthe new window labeled Select Object a list of printer managers appears Select the one you want to use If the window is blank create an object complete steps 1 through 5 8 You then return to the Create Printer Agent window 9 Inthe field listed as Gateway Types click HP Gateway and then click OK At this point an information window asks whether you want to load the printer manager Click Yes or OK 10 In the Configure HP Printer Gateway select either IP or IPX protocol IPX is the default 11 Alist of printers appea
190. g below the icon disappears Double click the container unit object again and the refreshed screen appears Verify that all of the printer associated items are gone If not repeat this process until all associated objects have been deleted from the screen After all of these objects have been removed you can build new queues Be sure to use the same naming convention as before When finished with the NWAdmin32 program close or minimize the window Engineering Detail Software Technical Reference Installing drivers using NDPS INF install only Internal Follow these instructions to vend remotely install the driver to other computers when they connect to the NDPS printer agent Note To install HP drivers using NDPS first create the NDPS Broker and NDPS Manager See your Novell administrator to do this Loading the drivers Internal If you do not want to vend drivers go to the next section Making NDPS printer agents Using NWAdmin32 load the drivers into Resource Management Services RMS of the NDPS Broker 1 Right click the NDPS Broker object and then click RMS the resource management button located on the right 2 Click Add Resources 3 Inthe resource types field select the operating system to which you want to vend 4 Click Add This opens the Add Resources window 5 Click the Browse button and navigate to the location in which you want to install the drivers 6 Select the correct driver INF file 7 Install the
191. ge Order Page Order specifies the order in which the pages of your document are printed Front to Back prints the document so that page 1 is the front of the document Back to Front prints the document so that page 1 is at the back of the document The Back to Front setting is useful if the user is printing to a face up output bin to achieve output in the correct order Note The page ordering operation works on whole sheets of paper rather than on individual logical pages Accordingly if you set N up to be greater than one the ordering of logical pages a physical sheet of paper does not change Advanced features The Advanced button allows you to select items such as paper size and copies in the driver even though today most programs support these features in their print dialog box or through the program page settings or special controls that are not commonly used This is a Microsoft pop up dialog The main features of interest are described HP LaserJet 4200 PCL 6 Advanced Options 2 xi de HP LaserJet 4200 PCL 6 Advanced Document Settings El ag Paper Output Paper Size letter I Copy Count 1 Copy ia Document Options Halftoning Auto Select Print Optimizations Enabled wy Printer Features Send True Type as Bitmap Disabled REL On OK Cancel Figure 36 The default appearance of the Advanced subtab Paper Size Paper Size sets the default paper size used by the driver if the program does
192. ght Hewlett Packard 2002 Installation Notes Figure 50 Welcome dialog box Table 46 Welcome dialog box text strings itle of dialog box Text in dialog box User options and descriptions Welcome Welcome to the HP LaserJet 4200 or HP Next takes you to the HP Software LaserJet 4300 Series Printing System License Agreement dialog box Setup Wizard Click Installation Notes to open the file It is strongly recommend that you close all READXXXX RTF other programs before running this Setup wizard Before continuing refer to the Setup poster and make any required connections Click Next to continue Copyright Hewlett Packard XXXX Cancel takes you to the Exit Setup dialog box 144 Installing Windows printing system components Software Technical Reference HP Software License Agreement Please read the following license agreement Use the scroll bar to view the entire agreement Note The limited warranty for this product and accompanying software is located in the product documentation that your received with this product Please review it at this time ATTENTION USE OF THE SOFTWARE IS SUBJECT TO THE HP SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS SET FORTH BELOW USING THE SOFTWARE INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE LICENSE TERMS IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THESE LICENSE TERMS YOU MUST RETURN THE SOFTWARE FOR FULL REFUND IF THE SOFTWARE IS SUPPLIED WITH ANOTHER PRODUCT YOU M Y RETURN THE ENTIRE UNUSED PRODUCT FOR FULL
193. gure 35 The default appearance of the 99 Figure 36 The default appearance of the Advanced subtab 100 Figure 37 The default appearance of the Paper Quality tab 102 Figure 38 The default appearance of the Finishing tab 000 105 Figure 39 Finishing tab with duplexing unit and paper handling accessory 106 Figure 40 Page Order nennen nennen nennen nennen 107 Software Technical Reference 15 16 Figure 41 Figure 42 Figure 43 Figure 44 Figure 45 Figure 46 Figure 47 Figure 48 Figure 49 Figure 50 Figure 51 Figure 52 Figure 53 Figure 54 Figure 55 Figure 56 Figure 57 Figure 58 Figure 59 Figure 60 Figure 61 Figure 62 Figure 63 Figure 64 Figure 65 Figure 66 Figure 67 Figure 68 Figure 69 Figure 70 Figure 71 Figure 72 Figure 73 Figure 74 Figure 75 Figure 76 Figure 77 Figure 78 Figure 79 Figure 80 Figure 81 Figure 82 Figure 83 Figure 84 Figure 85 Figure 86 Figure 87 Figure 88 Figure 89 Figure 90 Figure 91 RUEDA 108 Preview images Legal on Letter Scale to Fit off left and on right 109 Watermark Details ied ot E
194. h Connected to the network e g the default option printer is connected directly to the network or shared through another If Connected to the network is selected computer on the network option button Next takes you to the Network Setup dialog box Back returns you to the HP Software License Agreement dialog box Cancel takes you to the Exit Setup dialog box Software Technical Reference Installing Windows printing system components 147 Select Port 1 xj Select the port you want to use with this printer Parallel Y Express Install using HP recommended defaults Dy invent C Documents and Figure 54 Select Port dialog box Table 50 Select Port dialog box text strings Title of dialog box Text in dialog box User options and descriptions Select Port Select the port you want to use with Regardless of the port chosen If Connected to this computer this printer Parallel or Other clicking Next was selected in the Type of Parallel option button takes you to the printer Model Connection dialog box Express Install using HP dialog box recommended defaults check box Back returns you to the Type of Connection dialog box Selecting the Express Install check box selected by default installs the PCL 6 driver Cancel takes you to the Exit Setup dialog box Other option button 148 Installing Windows printing system components Software Tech
195. h OK or Cancel buttons the interpretation of the buttons is as follows e Clicking OK accepts the change that was just made and the driver then resets the conflicting control to a setting that is compatible with the new value e Clicking Cancel rejects the change that was just made setting the control back to its previous value Layout tab The Layout tab is a Microsoft owned tab page that you can use to change the layout of printed pages The Layout tab is the default tab that appears when you click Document Defaults or Printing Preferences depending on your operating system for the driver or for a software program The following group boxes are available on the Layout tab e Orientation e Print on Both Sides when a duplexing unit is installed e Order 98 Driver features Software Technical Reference gt hp LaserJet 4200 PCL 6 Printing Preferences 21 xi Layout Finishing Effects Destination M Orientation Portrait Landscape Page Order Front to Back Back to Front Advanced OK Cancel 0010 Figure 35 The default appearance of the Layout tab Orientation Orientation refers to the layout of the image on the page It does not affect in any way the manner in which the media is fed into the printer The default orientation is Portrait Note Nearly all programs establish the orientation for the printed page so the page orientation in t
196. has occurred UPGRADE A power cycle occurred during UPGRADING No update has occurred Resend update through PRINTER parallel port A power cycle occurred during WAIT FOR PRINTER The update has been completed TO REINITIALIZE Print jobs sent to the printer while an update is in process do not interrupt the update The following table lists possible reasons for the failure of a remote firmware update and the corrective action to take for each situation Table 7 Troubleshooting a firmware update failure The RFU file is corrupted The printer recognizes that the file is corrupted and rejects the update Download the image from the http www hp com go 1j4200 firmware or http www hp com go lj4300 firmware Web site again and send the new file to the printer The wrong printer model is contained in the RFU The printer recognizes the model mismatch and rejects file the update Download the correct image from the http www hp com go 1j4200 firmware or http www hp com go lj4300 firmware Web site and send it to the printer The upgrade was interrupted See the Troubleshooting a firmware update table Flash hardware failure occurred Although it is extremely unlikely the device might have a hardware failure Call technical support to address the problem Note All HP LaserJet printers leave the factory with the latest available firmware version installed If a remote D firmware update fails the RFU file must be sent over
197. have specified a communications mode Next takes TCP IP Settings you to the printer Model dialog Use default port name check box box Software Technical Reference Installing Windows printing system components 153 Title of dialog box Text in dialog box User options and descriptions Back returns you to the Identify Printer dialog box Cancel takes you to the Exit Setup dialog box Select the model you are setting up Model hp LaserJet 4200 hp LaserJet 4200n hp LaserJet 4200tn h a hp LaserJet 4200dtn p hp LaserJet 4200dtns ho Lasenet 4200dtnsl zi invent Description hp LaserJet 4200 lt Back Cancel Figure 61 Printer Model dialog box dialog box Table 56 Printer Model dialog box text string itle of dialog box Text in dialog box User options and descriptions Model Select the model you are setting up Next takes you to the Installation Type dialog box Model Back returns you to the Select Port dialog box Description when you are performing a direct connection installation or to the Set Network CommunicationMode dialog box when you are performing a network installation Cancel takes you to the Exit Setup dialog box 154 Installing Windows printing system components Software Technical Reference Installation Type x Choose the installation type Typical Installation The following components will be installed hp LaserJet 4200 PCL 6 Driver
198. he PIN box The Stored Job PIN coupling has a PIN restriction of four ASCII numeric characters ASCII 0 30 through 0 39 If you type non numeric characters they are removed immediately If you type more than four characters the characters past the fourth are truncated The field temporarily accepts fewer than four digits in the string but when the edit field loses focus the zeroes pad the left end until there are exactly four digits The default initialized value for the PIN is 0000 for Private Job and Stored Job when Require PIN to Print is selected Private Job Use this option to send a print job directly to the printer memory Selecting Private Job activates the PIN field The print job can be printed only after you type a PIN at the printer control panel After the job is printed the printer Software Technical Reference Driver features 79 removes the job from the printer memory This feature is useful when you printing sensitive or confidential documents that you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing Private Job stores the print job on the hard disk After it is released for printing the private job is immediately deleted from the printer If more copies are needed you must reprint the job from the program If you send a second private job to the printer with the same user name and job name as an existing private job and you have not released the original job for printing the job will overwrite the existing job reg
199. he PIN box The Stored Job PIN coupling has a PIN restriction of four ASCII numeric characters ASCII 0 30 through 0 39 If you enter non numeric characters they are removed immediately If you enter more than four characters the characters past the fourth are truncated The field temporarily allows fewer than four digits in the string but when the edit field loses focus the zeroes pad the left end until there are exactly four digits The default initialized value for the PIN is 0000 for Private Job and Stored Job with Require PIN to Print selected Private Job This option allows you to send a print job directly to the printer memory Selection of Private Job activates the PIN field The print job can be printed only after you type a PIN in the printer control panel After the job is printed the printer removes the job from the printer memory This feature is useful when you are printing sensitive or confidential documents that you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing Private Job stores the print job on the hard disk or in printer RAM memory After it is released for printing the private job is immediately deleted from the printer If more copies are needed you have to reprint the job from the program If you send a second private job to the printer with the same user name and job name as an existing private job and you have not released the original job for printing the job will overwrite the existing job regardless of the PI
200. he driver c 7 is useful only for the few programs that do not set an orientation Print on Both Sides The Print on Both Sides control represents duplex printing and is visible only when the Device Settings tab indicates that a duplexing unit is installed The control allows the user to select between printing one or both sides of the paper Click None to print on one side of the paper only Click Flip on Short Edge or Flip on Long Edge to print on both sides of the paper Short Edge prints portrait pages that are read by turning pages over like a notepad Long Side prints portrait pages that are read by turning pages as in a book The default setting is None that is not duplexing When the Print on Both Sides setting on the Layout tab is activated by selecting either Flip on Long Edge or Flip on Short Edge the document preview image in the Finishing tab changes to show a spiral binding along either the left or the top edge of the page In addition a folded over corner appears in the lower right portion of the preview image indicating that printing will occur on the back side An arrow on the folded over corner points in the direction that the pages would be flipped if they were bound together Note The duplexing unit generally has constraints on the paper size small or oversize and media heavy stock labels that may be duplexed Check the printer control panel for specific restrictions Software Technical Reference Driver features 99 Pa
201. he information varies according to HP LaserJet model number driver date and versions The About tab is shown in the following illustration 5 hp LaserJet 4200 PCL 6 Properties HP42006 GPD 6 17 2002 Figure 46 About tab 118 Driver features Software Technical Reference Device settings The Device Settings tab communicates the hardware configuration of the printer to the driver The Device Settings tab sheet appears whenever the driver is opened from the Printers folder by selecting and right clicking the printer and then clicking Properties for the driver When the driver is opened from within a program the Device Settings tab is not visible When opened from the Printers folder the Device Settings tab appears as shown in the following illustration amp hp LaserJet 4200 PCL 6 Properties BE General Sharing Ports Advanced Security Device Settings About G HP LaserJet 4200 PCL 6 Device Settings za Form To Tray Assignment Printer Auto Select Letter Trav 1 Letter Trav 2 Letter Tray 3 500 Sheet Not Available Tray 3 1500 Sheet Mot Available Tray 4 500 Sheet Mot Available Tray 4 1500 Sheet Mot Available Manual Feed Tray 1 Letter Envelope Feeder Not Available HP Font Installer Installable Options Envelope Feeder Not Installed Tray 3 Not Installed Tray 4 Not Installed Accessory Output Bin Not Installed OK Cancel Apoly Figure
202. he printer assign it to a zone on the network download files and fonts and change most of the printer settings e Seta password for the printer e from the computer lock out functions on the printer s control panel to prevent unauthorized access See the printer software help Installation notes This text file contains important information about printer features instructions for installing the printing system software and technical assistance ColorSync profiles These text files contain color matching information for the Macintosh system and HP LaserJet color printers Online Help This HTML based help system replaces the Apple Guide help system that was provided with earlier HP printers The help system can be viewed through a browser or in the Macintosh OS Help Center 174 Installation for Macintosh IBM OS 2 and Linux operating systems Software Technical Reference Screen fonts OS classic These screen fonts are available only for Macintosh computers and Macintosh compatible computers Because the screen fonts match your printer fonts you can see on screen how your printed page will look Font support To ensure that you can use all installed fonts with the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers the Macintosh printing system includes the standard 35 screen fonts in 11 families Avant Garde Helvetica Narrow Times Bookman New Century Schoolbook Zapf Chancery Courier Palatino Zapf Dingbats Helvetica
203. he upper right corner of all properties tabs except for the Configure tab 56 Driver features Software Technical Reference Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the preview image When move the mouse over the preview image the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking on the image The light yellow dimensions label that appears below the preview image reflects the selected page size The horizontal dimension is always first so the order of the numbers will reverse when the orientation changes Click on the label to toggle between English and metric units Quick Sets Quick sets is a feature that is available on all tabs except NT Forms and Configure and that is used to store the current combination of driver settings that are found on all other tabs except NT Forms and Configure Quick sets are either preset or user defined printing specifications such as paper size pages per sheet and so on Defaults The default setting is Defaults Other settings are User s Manual and Untitled When Defaults is selected nearly all of the settings are restored to the combination that existed after the driver was installed the original settings However if the attribute combinations that are associated with watermark definitions custom paper sizes or the User s Manual quick set have been changed or deleted the original settings a
204. heck rate interval Maps to the Status check rate setting of Never Printer Status and Alerts will not track the status of print jobs Maps to the Status check rate setting of LessOften see allprinters LegacyPrinterDSRates section for more information 2 Maps to the Status check rate setting of LessOftenPlusOne see LegacyPrinterDSRates section for more information The Status check rate setting one tick to the right of LessOften 8 Maps to the Status check rate setting of Middle see LegacyPrinterDSRates section for more information The middle Status check rate setting 4 Maps to the Status check rate setting of MoreOftenLessOne see LegacyPrinterDSRates section for more information The Status check rate setting one tick to the left of MoreOften Maps to the Status check rate setting of MoreOften see EN LegacyPrinterDSRates section for more information SpecificPrinterName 0 5 Each printer can have its own independent status check rate just as the allprinters key does above Default values after installation LegacyPrinterDSRates This section contains key and value pairs that control the update interval Printer Status and Alerts uses to query the state of a print job within a printer The values for each key are in terms of milliseconds Therefore a value of 1000 is the equivalent of 1 second The lower the Status check rate value the more often the printer is queried for the state of a print job See the
205. hen you clear the Use different paper check box the source and media type for the first tab overwrites the other paper settings and the Add a blank back cover check box is cleared and disappears The setting for Source is is set to Automatically Select and the setting for Type is is set to Unspecified Source is The Source Is setting specifies the desired paper source to use for printing a document Different printer models support different paper sources such as upper tray envelope feed cassette and manual feed If you click Automatically Select the printer uses the paper tray that supports the paper size you have selected If you choose a paper source other than Automatically Select make sure that the correct paper size is loaded in the paper source other options are printer dependent Consult the operating manual for your printer to determine what these settings do and which settings are appropriate for the task you want to perform Type is This dropdown menu contains the media types supported by the printer as well as any user defined types that may have been created by a printer administrator using Web JetAdmin When the default setting Unspecified is used the printer uses its default media type usually Plain No mechanism exists for manually adding custom paper types from the driver these can only be added with the bidirectional communication mechanism and they must already exist in the printer when the bidire
206. hp LaserJet 4200 PCL 6 Properties General Ports Scheduling Sharing Security NT Forms Configure m Printer Model Other Options Use the Configure tab to tell the driver about the hardware configuration of the printer If bidirectional communication is enabled in a supported environment set up this tab by clicking the Update Now button If your environment does not support bidirectional communication the Update Now button is unavailable so you must manually configure the options on this tab The Configure tab is available when the driver is opened from the Printers folder by clicking Properties When you open the driver from within a program the Configure tab is not visible with a few exceptions such as when using Excel 5 0 or Corel R Chart 4 0 When opened from the Printers folder the Configure tab looks like the following illustration HP LaserJet 4200 More Paper Handling Options m Automatic Configuration Optional Paper Destinations Optional Paper Sources Duplexing Unit Update Now Envelope Feeder Mopier Enabled None m None m Note OK Cancel Figure 27 Configure tab The printer image in the lower right portion of the Configure tab represents the current physical configuration of the printer and corresponds to its configuration data either obtained automatically through bidirectional communication
207. ill be created on the disk Macintosh HD Select Folder button Quit button Install button default option If you want to install the files in a location other than the default Macintosh HD click Select Folder to specify a location You can also choose a Custom installation option from the drop down menu at upper left Click the Read Me button to open the Installer readme file Click the Install button to start the installation on the selected disk Click the Quit button to quit the Installer without making changes to the system Software Technical Reference Software Technical Reference Printer Dialog Extensions 05 Printer Descriptions OS X Printer Descriptions Classic hp Laserjet Utility Classic Installation Motes Classic hp LaserJet Help Classic hp Laserjet Installer Read Me Disk space available gt 408 Install Location Te Items will be installed on the disk fe install Location Mac Approximate disk space needed OK Quit b Figure 86 HP LaserJet Installer dialog box custom install Custom Install drop down menu Printer Descriptions HP LaserJet Utility Installation Notes ColorSync Profiles HP LaserJet Help LaserJet Printer Help USB Components Disk space available conditional Approximate disk space needed conditional The HP LaserJet Folder will be created on the disk Macintosh HD Select Folder but
208. ing 500 sheet stapler stacker output accessory optional HCI 1 500 sheet tray 1200 dpi ProRes 600 dpi dual beam scanner 12 000 page print cartridge 4200 series 18 000 page print cartridge 4300 series 1200 dpi ProRes 600 dpi dual beam scanner 12 000 page print cartridge 4200 series 18 000 page print cartridge 4300 series Software Technical Reference Trays 3 and 4 automatically renumber themselves when they are stacked If tray 3 is 1 500 sheet tray no tray 4 can be attached The 1 500 sheet tray is a high capacity tray but it does not use HP Jet link Software Technical Reference Purpose and scope 23 24 Purpose and scope Software Technical Reference software description Introduction The HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers come with software and installers for Microsoft R Windows R and Apple Computer Inc Macintosh systems UNIX R and OS 2 systems are supported and software is available on the Web For specific information about a system s installer drivers and components locate the section that corresponds to that system Supported operating systems The following operating systems OSs support the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 printing system software including standard printer command language PCL drivers and PostScript R PS emulation drivers Windows OSs support a full featured configuration of the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers other OSs support varying
209. ing system components Software Technical Reference Title of dialog box Text in dialog box User options and descriptions Click the Previous button to go back to the second screen in this sequence Click the Exit button to open the Exiting Registration dialog box xl DU Y ou have selected to exit Hewlett Packard registration invent If you would like to continue with registration please press the continue button to return to the place where you exited Otherwise you may go to the URL below to register your product at any time http www hp com go register Thank you for your valuable time Exit Figure 73 Exiting registration dialog box Table 68 Exiting registration text strings Exiting Registration You have selected to exit Hewlett Click the Continue button to go back to Packard s registration the screen where you were when you If you would like to continue with clicked the Exit button registration please press the continue Click the Exit button to close the button to return to the place where you WebReg utility exited Continue button default option Otherwise you can go to the universal resource locator URL below to register your product at any time http register hp com go register Thank you for your valuable time Exit button Customization Utility for Windows Use the Customization Utility button to create your own customized installation of printing system components To st
210. inter description for PCL 5 driver 124 Graphic option in drivers 93 Graphics Mode in printer drivers 101 guides See documentation configuring drivers for 113 configuring drivers for 114 configuring drivers for 78 enabling in driver 120 Bubble 54 context sensitive 53 context sensitive 98 for drivers 53 for drivers 97 online availability by operating system 125 What s this 97 HP Fast InfrRed Receiver Guide 125 HP Instant Support 32 using to build Novell queues 214 HP Jetdirect Guide 125 availability by operating system 124 description 174 localization 125 HP Network Registry Agent HPNRA 29 and HP Web JetAdmin 30 Configuration Page 32 description 30 Device Status page 31 Information tab 30 localization 126 Networking tab 34 Settings tab 32 and HP Web Access 30 availability by operating system 124 description 50 localization 125 using to access EWS 51 249 using to download firmware 44 Web site 51 availability by operating system 124 description 50 description 161 HPBDRVHI EXE utility 243 HPNRA HP Network Registry Agent 29 HPSASDRV MTX matrix file for driver support 239 HPSTATUS INI file for Printer Status and Alerts 234 availability of software components 124 changing job properties 193 changing printer drivers in the printer object 193 changing printer properties 193 driver availability 50 fonts supported 191 installing printer software 190 supporting the printing system software 25 System requirements 173 Ignore
211. intosh installer splash screen dialog box text strings itle of dialog box Text in dialog box User Options and Descriptions Splash screen hp LaserJet for Macintosh Click Continue to open the HP LaserJet Installer dialog box Continue button Software Technical Reference Installation for Macintosh IBM OS 2 and Linux operating systems 187 0060 Easy Install hp Laserjet Installer Read Click the Install button to install Printer Dialog Extensions O5 Printer Descriptions OS X Printer Descriptions Classic hp Laserjet Utility Classic Installation Notes Classic s More Disk space available gt 468 Install Location install Location Mac me i item will be installed on the disk Hiag Figure 85 HP LaserJet Installer dialog box easy install Approximate disk space needed 20 650K Quit EC instal Table 82 HP LaserJet Installer dialog text strings easy install Title of dialog box Text in dialog box User Options and Descriptions HP LaserJet Installe 188 Installation for Macintosh IBM OS 2 and Linux operating systems Easy Install drop down menu Click the Install button to install Printer Descriptions HP LaserJet Utility Installation Notes ColorSync Profiles Disk space available conditional Approximate disk space needed conditional The folder HP LaserJet Folder w
212. ion about the various installation dialog box sequences for the Macintosh operating system Main Install dialog box sequence This subsection provides information about the Macintosh installation dialog box sequence for the Easy Install the typical installation option hp LaserJet for Macintosh This installation was created with Installer VISE from Mind ision Software Figure 74 HP LaserJet for Macintosh installer splash screen dialog box Table 70 HP LaserJet for Macintosh installer splash screen dialog box text strings itle of dialog box Text in dialog box User Options and Descriptions Splash screen hp LaserJet for Macintosh Click Continue to open the HP LaserJet Installer dialog box Continue button 180 Installation for Macintosh IBM OS 2 and Linux operating systems Software Technical Reference hp LaserJet Installer _ Easy Install Click the Install button to install Printer Descriptions Classic hp LaserJet Utility Classic Installation Notes Classic hp LaserJet Help Classic Disk space available 408 080K Approximate disk space needed 14 664K r Install Location Rems will be installed on the disk Cloud 9 install Location Claud 9 Figure 75 HP LaserJet Installer dialog box easy install I 1 Bom Table 71 HP LaserJet Installer dialog text strings easy install Title of dialog box Text in dialog box User Options and Descriptions HP LaserJet Installe
213. ions Intel R is a U S trademark of Intel Corporation Java TM is a U S trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc HP UX Release 10 20 and later and P UX RElease 11 00 and later in both 32 and 64 bit configurations on all HP 9000 computers are Open Group UNIX 95 branded products Microsoft R MS DOS R Windows R and Windows NT R are U S registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Netscape and Netscape Navigator are trademarks or registered trademarks of Netscape Communications Inc Pentium R is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation TrueType TM is a U S trademark of Apple Computer Inc UNIX R is a registered trademark of the Open Group Table of Contents List of tables List of figures 1 Purpose and scope WMtPOCU CTO mo mms 19 HP LaserJet 4200 and HP LaserJet 4300 series 20 2 Software description cQ 25 Supported operating SySteims etre suka a X ee be R Rte RE uere 25 Technology background 25 HP LaserJet user 26 Adobe R Acrobat 44442444 50 26 oseanen Pete ser 26 HP LaserJet 4200 4300 series printing system installation
214. ithout prompting the user e port xxxx is used to specify the default port when performing an unattended installation The value specified by xxxx should be a valid port and should contain no spaces for example LPT1 printer n is used to specify the default printer when doing an unattended installation The value specified by n is an integer that references the list of available printers For example the following printers are available for the HP LaserJet 4200 or HP LaserJet 4300 series printer installation 0 HP LaserJet 4200 or HP LaserJet 4300 printer 1 HP LaserJet 4200 or HP LaserJet 4300n printer 2 HP LaserJet 4200 or HP LaserJet 4300tn printer HP LaserJet 4200 HP LaserJet 4300 printer 4 HP LaserJet 4200 or HP LaserJet 4300 printer 5 HP LaserJet 4200 or HP LaserJet 4300dtnsl printer e is used to specify whether the selected printer is the default printer when you have multiple printers connected to your network The value specified by n is an integer that is O or 1 For this argument entering 1 one sets the selected printer as the default printer Entering zero 0 or not specifying a value at all sets the printer as a non default printer You can preset these options in the SETUP LST file located in the root directory of the HP LaserJet software CD ROM In the defaults section add the following syntax Defaults Options port lt value gt printer lt number gt pd lt
215. ivates the drop down menus but does not change their value No Bubble Help is available for the inactive drop down menus The settings revert to defaults when Use different paper for first page is selected again First Page Other Pages Back Cover This option appends a blank page from an alternate paper source No back cover Use the first page source Use an altemate source Source 5 Unspecified 71 Figure 22 Back Cover mini tab Size is 72 This feature actually functions as two controls a drop down menu that contains all the supported media sizes including any user defined custom sizes and a text label that indicates the dimensions of the selected size Moving the pointer over the text label causes the arrow to change to a gloved hand which indicates that the area beneath the pointer is selectable Clicking here toggles the units of measure between inches and millimeters offering the same options on the dimensions label in the preview image Selecting a new size from the drop down menu updates the media dimensions text label as well as the preview image Changing the orientation on the Basics tab also updates the dimensions text label Size can be specified only for the first page or for all pages On the Other Pages and Back Cover mini tabs the Size isdrop down menu does not appear because the media size must be consistent for all pages of the job Certain software programs can override this command
216. k Install and then follow the instructions on the screen to complete the software installation If you are installing the printer software on a Macintosh OS X system please be patient The installer must perform an initial search of the computer for up to one full minute During this time the installer may appear to be making no progress If you want to use the HP LaserJet utility Mac OS 8 6 9 1 only using a USB connection to configure Apple Talk Zone or to name your printer you must select Custom Install and then select HP USB and all other applicable components Installing the HP USB components will require you to restart your computer If you do not want to use the HP LaserJet utility continue with the following Easy Install instructions When software installation is complete click Quit Choose one of the following options to finish setting up your printer To set up a USB direct printer connection with Mac OS 8 6 9 1 To set up an AppleTalk networked printer with Mac OS 8 6 9 1 To set up a printer with Mac OS X To set up a USB direct printer connection with Mac OS 8 6 9 1 178 1 2 Run the Apple Desktop Printer Utility Select HP Printer USB if you installed this component during a Custom Install and intend to use the HP LaserJet utility for configuration select Printer USB and then click Click Change in the USB Printer Selection area Installation for Macintosh IBM OS 2 and Linux operati
217. ke sure Printer Status and Alerts is closed If it is not right click the Printer Status and Alerts tray icon and click Exit Type the command hpbdrvhk s Name of the Printer Goes Here Repeat step 4 for each printer name that is to be added Power cycle the computer off and on again R When Printer Status and Alerts is finished loading the name of the printer supplied in step 4 will appear in the left pane of the Printer Status and Alerts application window 8 Any printer that uses the same driver model name as the printer referenced in step 4 will also appear in the left pane of the Printer Status and Alerts application window Removing support for a specific printer 1 Open a command prompt window 238 Engineering Detail Software Technical Reference 2 Change directories so that the current directory is the windows system directory For Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows Me operating systems it will typically be windows system for Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP systems it will be winntisystem32 3 Make sure Printer Status and Alerts is closed If it is not right click the Printer Status and Alerts tray icon and click Exit Type the command hpbdrvhk u Name of the Printer Goes Here Repeat step 4 for each printer name that is to be removed Power cycle the computer off and on again When Printer Status and Alerts is finished loading the of the printer s supplied
218. l communication features Windows XP 64 amp 32 Windows 2000 Windows NT 4 0 Windows 95 98 Me 052 rcs Pos Ps Pce POLS PS POLe 5 PS PS ke ke KE Fs es a Software Technical Reference Driver features 127 Driver Management and Configuration utility Table 25 Driver support for DMC utility feature Windows XP 64 amp 32 Pele Pols PS Feature lockout Enterprise X X X Autoconfiguration EAC NE Ul features Table 26 Driver support for Ul features Sess Nuance d gt es EUN Page preview 0 fe E Printer image X X X X bitmaps with hot spots Page layout graphical representation X X X X x mE Accessability X EE Accessible X X X X X X a Help features gt lt 4 Table 27 Driver support for Help features What s this Help F1 MS Windows 2 Help 128 Driver features Software Technical Reference Constraint support Table 28 Driver support for constraints Windows 64 32 Windows Windows NT 4 0 Windows 95 98 M 2000 58 ae X X X X X X X X X messages Gray out X X X X options Constraint X X X warnings by symbol Document layout
219. l copies of a print job using the control panel The number of quick copy print jobs that can be stored in the printer is set from the printer control panel Note The printer configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick copy or proof and hold jobs The number is set on the printer control panel in the Configuration menu and the default is 32 When this preset limit is reached a newer document will overwrite the oldest Also a document that has the same user and job name as one already stored on the hard disk will overwrite the existing document Quick copy jobs are deleted if the printer s power is removed Proof and Hold This option stores the print job on the printer hard disk or in printer RAM memory and prints only the first copy of the job allowing you to check the first copy If the document prints correctly you can print the remaining copies of the print job from the printer control panel The number of proof and hold print jobs that can be stored in the printer is set from the printer control panel Using a PIN for Private Job and Stored Job The Private Job and Stored Job options can be secured by a four digit personal identification number PIN This number must be typed in the printer control panel before the printer prints the job You can choose a predefined PIN or you can also create a custom PIN The box labeled PIN is usually inactive Selecting Private Job or Stored Job along with Require PIN to Print activates t
220. l the ZENworks support pack on the server Name the policy to describe its purpose Click Next to continue creating policies Click Create Another Policy When all of the policies have been created click finish You need a different user policy for each printer driver or printer driver configuration used Associating the queues with the printer agent Internal 1 ON OOK W rn 9 10 11 When finished creating the policy open each policy and select the NT User Printer Policy check box Click Details Click Add Select highlight the NDS print queue object you previously made for this user group Click OK Click New Driver Click Clear Current Settings Click Select Printer Model Click Have Disk and browse to where the drivers are located Install the driver that you want associated with this policy When the driver has been installed click OK click OK again and then click Cancel When you log on to the system the printer driver should be automatically sent to the workstation currently in use If the printer driver is being sent to the workstation currently in use continue completing the remaining users If not a problem might exist with the ZENworks installation For installation information go to the following URL http www Novell com Click Get Support and then click Knowledgebase Leave the first item in the dialog box blank Under No 2 Select Document Sets use the drop down menu to select TIDs amp M
221. les the job status monitoring mechanism for the selected printer If the refresh rate for a given printer is set to Never then subsequent jobs sent to that printer will not appear in the Printer Status and Alerts window If the Never setting is selected when the scope control is set to All Printers then all job status monitoring will be disabled However even when job status monitoring is disabled you can still open the status window and view the printer status panels Changes to the refresh rate settings affect any subsequent jobs submitted to the affected printer Existing jobs that are already being processed have a fixed refresh rate which was determined according to the setting in the Refresh Rate panel when the job was submitted Refresh rate intervals for direct connect printers are as follows e Less Often setting 5 minutes e setting to the right of Less Often 2 minutes e Two settings to the right of Less Often 1 minute Three settings to the right of Less Often 30 seconds e Often setting 10 seconds On network printers the refresh rate interval changes depending on the stage of the print job The Alerts options panel has controls to determine when the Printer Status and Alerts window automatically appears for each printer that has an icon in the left pane The drop down menu provides a list of available printers for which to make the selection An option for all printers is included as the default selection
222. lex Unit for 2 Sided Printing If a duplexing unit is installed in the printer select Duplex Unit for 2 Sided Printing and then click Installed When installed the Print on Both Sides control will appear in the Layout tab You can turn duplexing off or enable either long or short edge duplexing Printer Hard Disk If a hard disk is installed in the printer select Printer Hard Disk and then click Installed The printer hard disk enables additional features such as additional Job Storage options mopying and downloading fonts and forms to the printer s hard disk The utility to download and manage fonts and forms is separate from the driver The driver does not explicitly support fonts and forms on the printer s hard disk Mopier Enabled A mopier is an HP designed printer that produces multiple collated copies from a single print job Multiple original printing mopying increases printer performance and reduces network traffic by sending the job to the printer once then storing it on the hard disk The remainder of the copies are printed at the printer s fastest speed All documents can be created controlled managed and finished from the desktop which eliminates the extra step of using a photocopier The HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers support the Transmit Once mopying feature and the Mopier Enabled option is enabled by default if a hard disk is installed and the Printer Hard Disk setting is Installed in the Device S
223. lick the Update Now button to automatically reflect the new configuration in the driver For more information about the Driver Automatic Configuration feature see Driver Autoconfiguration Printer image The bitmap image in the lower right portion of the Configure tab represents the current physical configuration of the printer according to the driver configuration data which can be obtained automatically through bidirectional communication or configured manually in the Paper Handling Options group box It should have the same appearance as the image in the same location on the Paper tab and the Destination tab 90 Driver features Software Technical Reference NT Forms tab features The NT Forms tab appears only in the Microsoft Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP operating environments The NT Forms tab like the Configure tab can be viewed only from the Properties window hp LaserJet 4200 PCL 6 Properties General Ports Scheduling Sharing Security NT Forms Configure Eorm Tray Assignments Available Trays Use this tab to assign a paper size and type to each tray Tray 1 Select a paper tray from the Available This Tray Contains Trays list then select the size and Size Forms type of paper that is loaded into that i tray Unspecified m Unspecified m Clear All To clear the assignments for all trays m click the Clear All button
224. llation Type dialog box text 0 m 155 Printer Name dialog box text 0 156 Printer Sharing dialog box text 0 157 Finish dialog box text 158 Exit Setup dialog box text 159 Custom Installation dialog box text strings ssssssseeeeeeeeenenn 160 Hewlett Packard s Electronic Registration text strings 161 Welcome to Hewlett Packard s Registration dialog box text strings 162 Hewlett Packard s Electronic Registration dialog box text strings 1 of 3 163 Hewlett Packard s Electronic Registration dialog box text strings 2 of 3 165 Hewlett Packard s Electronic Registration dialog box text strings 3 of 3 166 Exiting registration text 167 Windows servers with Windows clients 170 HP LaserJet for Macintosh installer splash screen dialog box text strings 180 HP LaserJet Installer dialog text strings easy install 181 HP LaserJet Installer dialog text strings custom install 182 Installing dialog text 183 Installation successful dialog text
225. llation was successful dialog box Table 85 Installation successful dialog text strings itle of dialog box Text in dialog box User Options and Descriptions Installation was successful If you are Click the Quit button to exit the Installer finished click Quit to leave the Installer If The Printer Setup Assistant opens Click the Continue button to return to the HP LaserJet Installer you want to perform additional installations click Continue IBM OS 2 Warp 3 0 and later 5 2 installation instructions Installation procedures differ depending upon whether or not a printer object exists on the OS 2 desktop Use the instructions that match the desktop Installing a printer in OS 2 when printer object is missing Use this procedure when a printer object does not appear on the computer desktop To create a printer object and install a printer driver follow these steps 190 Installation for Macintosh IBM OS 2 and Linux operating systems Software Technical Reference Note gt N 9 Use this procedure if the OS 2 desktop does not printer object system have this configuration if no printer was selected during OS 2 installation or if all the print objects have been deleted from the desktop Open the templates folder that is located in OS 2 system folder after OS 2 installation Click the Printer template Press and hold the right mouse button Drag the template to Desktop Relea
226. log x etr EE e t e et Pete E Ho 216 General Device Information dialog box 217 NetWare dial g DOR edid tii been et ead ie e Mor 218 NetWare dialog box queues 219 Queues dialog box Available Queues 2 2 01 220 Create Queue dialog box 220 NetWare dialog box displaying queues 221 TOP IP dialog DO Et rte Et Pe ep eee 222 NetWare dialog box beginning an NDS queue sees 223 NetWare dialog box queues 224 Queues dialog box NDS queue 2 2202 nennen nnne 225 Create Queue dialog box NDS queue 226 NetWare Administrator window 32 227 Print Layout of an NDS Queue sse nennen nnne nennen nene 228 NDS print queue objects 2 229 Bindery print queue objects 3 2 230 Software Technical Reference 17 18 Software Technical Reference Purpose and scope Introduction This Software Technical Reference STR provides information and troubleshooting tips for the printing system software for the HP LaserJet 4200 and HP LaserJet 4300 s
227. n of Solution s When a job is printing and Try changing the device to a Printer Status and Alerts tracks different port the status of the print job it immediately shows the Unknown Job state When a job is printing and 1 Verify that the connection is Printer Status and Alerts tracks valid by clicking the printer icon the status of the print job after a within Printer Status and Alerts few minutes of time it eventually shows the Unknown Job state It always behaves this way 240 Engineering Detail Bidirectional communication is supported only for a limited set of network port types for version 1 01 of Printer Status and Alerts HP Standard TCP IP port Microsoft Standard TCP IP port LPR ports shared ports server share includes NetWare shared ports Bidirectional communication also supports line printer terminal LPT ports and DOT4 ports both for parallel and USB connections but Printer Status and Alerts does not provide job status for these port types rather it provides device alerts Printer Status and Alerts does not support shared LPT ports or shared DOT4 ports If the printer device status shows up correctly then this is most likely a compatibility issue with the printer driver see solution 2 for this problem If it shows a broken connection JPG then the problem is with the device and Printer Status and Alerts is unable to communicate with it Resolve the communication problem
228. n this check box is selected the preview image lightens to show the expected appearance of the printed page when this feature is applied The option is off by default The EconoMode option can also be activated from the printer control panel The setting on the EconoMode option on the Print Quality tab on or off overrides the setting on the printer control panel display as shown on the following table If an HP cartridge is not used EconoMode is not available regardless of the driver or control panel setting Table 16 EconoMode Settings 104 Driver features Software Technical Reference Finishing tab features The appearance of the Finishing tab differs depending on the printer model and paper handling accessories installed The following illustration shows the default appearance of the Finishing tab gt hp LaserJet 4200 PCL 6 Printing Preferences Paper Qualty Pint age borders Software Technical Reference Driver features 105 Figure 38 default appearance of the Finishing tab The full range of settings for the Finishing tab is shown in the following illustration gt hp LaserJet 4200 PCL 6 Printing Preferences Layout Paper Quality Finishing Effects Destination Document Options mm Pages per Sheet Print Page Borders Page Urder Right then Down Booklet Layout Off Rotate by 180 degrees Al xl Stapling Options None
229. nd on right 66 Figure 19 Watermark 5 67 Figure 20 accade eed c Lune dank v ene nite 70 Figure 21 Other rea pe der Viene 71 Figure 22 Back Cover mint tab toit Hed tae eese tren ro na a eerte iren ed ced ls 72 Figure 23 Custom Paper Size dialog box sssssssssssssseseeeee nennen nennen nnne nens 73 Fig re 24 DeStINALION tA iiti ette EE Ye e DEL D NDE RES 78 Figure 25 Basics tab nin unte i DIES Er dae D HERR EN IRR Re UR 83 Figure 26 About This Driver dialog 84 Figure 27 Configure tab eee ee hex Tee an de dice d ec 85 Figure 28 Configure Font DIMMs dialog box nennen nnn nennen 89 Figure 29 Driver NI Forms taD en ette te eee e 91 Figure 30 Page 93 Fig re 31 di te gs 94 Figure 32 Job Storage 95 Figure 33 Device Settings tab 022224 97 Figure 34 A typical constraint message with an OK 98 Fi
230. nents Software Technical Reference Method 1 Command line Type the following at the command line do not type the beginning and ending quotation marks lt CD ROM ROOT gt SETUP SETUP EXE PORT XXXX PRINTERE N PD N Method 2 SETUP LST Use the SETUP LST file to specify command line arguments to the installer for an unattended installation You can send command line arguments in one of the following ways e Send the command directly to the installer e Send the command using the SETUP LST file located in the setup directory e Use a combination of the two methods For example this file contains two options port and printer The installer operates as normal because the u option has not been specified If you use setup u for the installer it operates in unattended mode and uses the two values specified in the defaults section of the SETUP LST file If you use setup u printer 4 for the installer it operates in unattended mode and chooses the HP LaserJet 4200 or HP LaserJet 4300 The options specified on the command line override the options specified in the SETUP LST file The options available can also include the u option Using this option key makes the installer always operate as unattended The following descriptions explain the available options e signals the installer to use the specified port and printer given on the command line or in this file and to use all default selections Installation then proceeds w
231. new firmware to the nennen 42 Software Technical Reference 3 Remote firmware update through a local Windows 42 Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows 42 Windows 95 98 Me NT 4 0 2000 42 Remote firmware update through a Windows 43 Remote firmware update for UNIX 43 Remote firmware update using FTP on a direct network 43 Remote firmware update using the TCP IP address and 43 Remote firmware update using FTP and a 44 Using HP Web JetAdmin to download the firmware to the 44 Printer messages during firmware 44 Troubleshooting a firmware nennen nennen ntes 45 E mail commarid neta tn e emat a edd uae a n EX RE 46 Euro 46 Printing system nn en nnns 47 Printing system and 201 eene enne nnne nennen nennen nnn 47 HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 software CD ROMs for Windows
232. nfiguration are the duplexing unit optional paper trays dual inline memory modules DIMMs and the hard drive If the environment supports bidirectional communication the installer presents Driver Autoconfiguration as an installable component by default for a Typical Installation and as an optional installable component for a Custom Installation The Driver Autoconfiguration component installs the bidirectional communication software If the installation environment does not support bidirectional communication the Driver Autoconfiguration option does not appear during installation However installed drivers will be configured automatically in accordance with the HP printer bundle that is selected during installation of the printing system software Driver Autoconfiguration works in four ways n environments that support bidirectional communication the computer communicates with the printer determines the physical configuration and then configures the driver accordingly e Ifthe configuration of the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers change after installation the driver can be automatically updated with the new configuration in environments that support bidirectional communication For example if the base printer model is installed and an optional duplexing unit is added later you can automatically configure the duplexing unit in the driver by clicking the Update Now button on the driver s Configuration tab The Update Now butt
233. nfiguration page 1 Press the SELECT button the one with the check mark to open the menus Press the up and down buttons to scroll to INFORMATION and then press the SELECT button Press the up and down buttons to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION Press the select button to print the configuration page afr WwW Inn Look in the configuration page section marked Printer Information for the Firmware Datecode The firmware date code will look something like this 20020702 03 002 0 Downloading the new firmware from the HP Web site The remote firmware update RFU file and an associated readme file are packaged together as a self extracting EXE file For detailed instructions about how to download the EXE file go to one of the following Web sites http www hp com go 1j4200 firmware http www hp com go lj4300 firmware Software Technical Reference Software description 41 The EXE file consists of a readme file and the RFU file Downloading the new firmware to the printer Note Note You can send an RFU update to a printer as long as the printer is in ready state the printer will wait for all input output I O channels to become idle before performing the update The firmware update involves a change in the format of nonvolatile random access memory NVRAM Any menu settings changed from the default settings will return to default settings and must be changed again if the user wants settings different from the defaults E
234. ng Jet Admin 3 42 4 2 to build Novell queues 214 Building a bindery queue Internal nnne nnne enn 219 Building 223 Removing printer objects from the Novell server Internal 226 Installing drivers using INF install only 231 Loading the drivers 231 Making print agents Internal 231 ZENworks 2 0 internal iniri nme reet at Ee cux atum 7 232 Making user policies 232 Associating the queues with the printer agent 232 Troubleshooting Internal eee estere Ere et rne tob bete rea th aie vb pua 233 Printer Status and Alerts Internal nennen 233 HP product models and drivers that support Printer Status and 233 Printer Status and Alerts INF file Internal 234 Description of HPSTATUS INI entries and their 234 Ellsmi cie EE 234 ete E 234 Legacy PrinterDS Rates 235 WindowsSpoolerDSRates esses nennen nennen enne snnt nnns enn 235 PrinterAlertRates a coa da era Leda RA Rada eL edad bap Rudd 236 EWSCONNEC nip Ide LM ME IEE
235. ng systems 174 availability of additional drivers 50 availability of software components 124 bidirectional communication support 127 bidirectional communication support 27 constraints support 129 document layout features support 129 driver bundles 123 Driver Management and Configuration DMC support 128 Help feature support 128 installable options support 134 job storage support 130 Index job stream output support 127 localization support 134 paper sizes support 132 paper sources support 133 paper type support 133 print controls support 130 software component localization 125 standalone drivers 123 stream output mode support 127 supporting the printing system software 25 user interface support 128 watermarks support 132 Optional Paper Sources options in drivers 87 order of pages option in drivers 62 ordering software CD ROMs through the Web 122 ordering supplies 32 orientation option in drivers 59 orientation options in drivers 99 OS 2 See IBM operating systems Other Pages option in drivers 102 Other Pages tab in drivers 71 Output Bin Options in drivers 117 Output Settings options in drivers 63 Page Order option in drivers 100 Page Setup tab in drivers 92 Pages per Sheet option in drivers 62 paper 203 sources and destinations 203 types and sizes supported 204 device status 39 printer features 20 Paper Handling Options in drivers 86 Paper Size option in drivers 100 driver support 132 paper source commands 204 driver suppor
236. ng systems Software Technical Reference 4 Select the USB printer the printer selection window and then click OK 5 Click Auto Setup to attempt to match a PPD file and USB driver to your printer If Auto Setup fails click Change Scroll through the list of printers select HP LaserJet 4200 or HP LaserJet 4300 and then click Select 6 Click Create To set up an AppleTalk networked printer with Mac OS 8 6 9 1 Run the Apple Desktop Printer Utility Select Printer AppleTalk and then click OK Click Change in the AppleTalk Printer Selection area Select the appropriate zone and printer and then click OK Click Auto Setup to attempt to match PPD file and USB driver your printer If Auto Setup fails click Change Scroll through the list of printers select HP LaserJet 4200 or HP LaserJet 4300 and then click Select 6 Click Create To set up a printer with Mac OS X In the Applications folder open the Utilities folder and then run the Print Center Click Add in Mac OS X 10 2 or Add Printer in Mac OS X 10 1 From the top pop up menu select the appropriate connection type for your printer Select or type any other information as indicated for the type of connection for your printer For example if you are using an AppleTalk connection select your printer zone or if you are using IP Printing type in an IP address Note If the automatic selection fails or if you want to manually selec
237. nical Reference Network Setup x invent Indicate the type of network connection Basic Microsoft Server Setup Create a connection network port to a printer attached directly to the network Your computer will manage its own print jobs and may optionally share the printer with other network users Client Setup The printer is already set up as a shared printer on the network and is managed by a server or another PC Help me determine which setup is right for me Setup will ask you questions to help determine the appropriate network setup for your situation EN Figure 55 Network Setup dialog box Table 51 Network Setup dialog box text strings itle of dialog box Text in dialog box User options and descriptions Network Setup Software Technical Reference Indicate the type of network connection Basic Microsoft Server Setup Create a connection network port to a printer attached directly to the network Your computer will manage its own print jobs and may optionally share the printer with other network users Client Setup The printer is already set up as a shared printer on the network and is managed by a server or another PC Help me determine which setup is right for me Setup will ask you questions to help you determine the appropriate network setup for your situation If the Client Setup option is selected Next takes you to the Specify Network Path dialog box and then to the
238. nnne 187 Main Install dialog box sequence ssssssssssssssseeeee eene nnne sn 187 IBM OS 2 Warp 3 0 and ater cu Fas ret RR REN 190 OS 2 installation MStruCtiONnS 190 Installing a printer 05 2 when printer object is 190 Installing a printer OS 2 with pre existing printer object on 191 FOWL SUPP OM 191 Changing a printer driver in the printer 193 Changing the printer properties enne enne nennen nennen nnns nnns 193 Changing the Job propertie Sisirin rtt satia e E X ERR eaten eb dna 193 Software Technical Reference 9 10 6 Engineering Detail 195 Driver Management and Configuration Utility Internal sese 195 EE 195 Enterprise AutoConfiguration 196 Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows 196 Driver INF file 4 1 nennen entren nennen nennen enne 197 Adding bidirectional communication component files seen 197 Adding minr installer fles 198 Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows Me
239. not specify a size This list contains all standard printer supported forms and any user defined forms that can be supported by the printer as defined through the server properties This setting is used by the driver to highlight the constraints that features have on paper size For example Letter size media cannot be pulled from an envelope feeder Copy Count and Collated This driver setting is useful for programs that do not provide a copy count The Collated check box appears when the Copy Count setting is greater than 1 The default collate setting is selected 100 Driver features Software Technical Reference Note This setting is not synchronized with the program s print dialog REt Resolution Enhancement technology is a simple on off setting rather than light medium dark off The On setting corresponds to the medium setting found in older HP printers Send TrueType as Bitmaps Send TrueType as Bitmaps is the only setting available and provides the user a safety net for those programs that have trouble dealing with TrueType fonts for special graphic purposes such as shading rotation or slanting The feature is not available when the Send Page as Raster option is selected The check box is clear off by default Using this feature TrueType fonts are first converted to bitmap softfonts prior to downloading The On setting causes the driver to send TrueType fonts to the printer as outlines which retains the standard format Outline of th
240. nstalled only on the network administrator s computer When it is installed on a host server any client can use HP Web JetAdmin through a supported Web browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 x or later or Netscape Navigator 4 x or later by browsing to the HP Web JetAdmin host HP Web JetAdmin 6 2 and later have the following features e task oriented user interface providing configurable views for network managers e customizable user profiles that can be customized to let network administrators include only the function that is being viewed or used e routing of instant e mail notification of hardware failure low supplies and other printer problems to different people e remote installation and management from anywhere by using only a standard Web browser 50 Software description Software Technical Reference e advanced automatic discovery of peripherals on the network without manually typing information about each printer into a database e simple integration into enterprise management packages e capacity to find peripherals based on parameters such as the Internet protocol IP address color capability and model name e capacity to organize peripherals into logical groups with an option that provides virtual office maps for easy navigation HP Web JetAdmin can be used for access to HP Web Access the embedded Web server ordering supplies and remote firmware updates The HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 software CD ROMs provid
241. nstalled to the Printer Descriptions folder which is in the Extensions folder within the System folder In Mac OS X the PPDs are installed in Library Printers PPDs Contents Resources lt lang gt Iproj where lang is the desired localized folder PPDs in combination with the LaserWriter driver provide access to the printer features and allow the computer to communicate with the printer An installation program for the PPDs is provided on the printing software CD ROM For Mac OS 8 6 to 9 x the Apple LaserWriter 8 driver must be installed to use the PPD file Use the Apple LaserWriter 8 driver that came with your Macintosh For Mac OS X use Print Center to print PDEs Mac OS X Printer Dialog Extensions PDEs are code plug ins that provide access to printer features such as number of copies duplexing and quality settings An installation program for the PDEs and other software is provided on the printing software CD ROM HP LaserJet Utility This Hewlett Packard printer utility is installed to the HP LaserJet folder in Macintosh OS 8 6 to 9 1 operating systems It provides configuration and management support for PS and PCL printers Use the HP LaserJet Utility to control features that are not available in the driver The illustrated screens make selecting printer features from the Macintosh computer easier than ever Use the HP LaserJet Utility to do the following e customize the printer s control panel messages t
242. nter control panel display If you try to type a lowercase character it automatically shifts to uppercase If you try to type a character with an ASCII code of fewer than 32 or more than 126 characters the character is removed from the edit field along with all characters that follow it If you try to type more than 16 characters any character beyond 16 is truncated When the dialog box is closed or the edit box loses focus an empty string is replaced with Untitled In those languages for which Untitled cannot be translated without the use of invalid characters the driver uses a string of Driver features Software Technical Reference three dashes The acceptable characters for job name and user name vary for each operating system string must be of a length and type that can appear on the printer control panel display Using Job Storage options when printing You can use Job Storage options in the Destination tab of the printer driver Note The printer driver that is installed on your computer must be configured to use the Job Storage features See Configuring the printer driver for a printer hard disk Click Print from the software program The Print dialog box appears Click Properties The Properties dialog box appears Click the Destination tab to show the destination options Click Job Storage on the drop down menu under Destination Features Click Settings The Job Storage Settings dialog box appears ou can then sel
243. number gt For example value LPT1 Driver only installation 1 Close all software programs 2 Click Start click Settings and then click Printers Software Technical Reference Installing Windows printing system components 169 3 Double click Add Printer 4 Answer the questions in the Add Printer Wizard dialog box until you reach the screen with the printer manufacturer list 5 Click Have Disk 6 Browse to the driver location using one of these options Inbox CD ROM Browse to the appropriate directory for your operating system and language Internet download Browse to the folder where the Web files were downloaded and decompressed 7 Select the appropriate information INF file 8 Click Open and then click OK 9 Select the appropriate printer 10 Follow the remaining instructions to complete the printer installation At this point the driver has been copied to your hard disk and is included with the list of installed printers Point and Print installation for Windows 95 98 Me NT 4 0 2000 and XP The following information will assist you as you install a printer driver using the Microsoft Point and Print function when you cannot see the printer on the network Point and Print is a Microsoft term that describes a two step driver installation process The first step is to install a shared driver on a network print server The second step is to point to the print server from a network client so that the client can us
244. o use hard disk storage Configuring the printer driver for a printer hard disk If the print driver on your computer is not yet configured to use the hard disk follow these steps Note These steps must be completed for each driver Click Start and then click Settings Navigate to the Printers or Printers and Faxes folder Right click the printer icon and click Properties Click the Device Settings tab Under Installable Options click Printer Hard Disk A drop down menu appears Click Installed This also selects Job Storage Enabled 7 Close all of the dialog boxes by clicking OK Your printer driver is now configured to use the hard disk and Job Storage features of your HP LaserJet 4200 or 4300 series printer 114 Driver features Software Technical Reference Job storage modes Using the Job Storage feature on your HP LaserJet 4200 or 4300 series printer you can store documents at the printer and then control the printing of these documents using the printer control panel This feature is intended to provide greater flexibility convenience security and cost savings The HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers offer the following Job Storage options Off This option turns the Job Storage feature off it is disabled which means the print job will not be stored in the printer Quick Copy Quick Copy stores a copy of a printed job on the hard disk and allows you to print additiona
245. od x x Reyded X Color Heavy 106 163 g m2 Cardstock gt 164 X g m2 Glossy 75 105 g m2 P gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt 2 lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt Paper sources Table 36 Driver support for paper sources IJ Windows XP 64 amp 32 Windows Windows NT 4 0 Windows 95 98 nid 2000 Pos Poi Ps Pog POL PS 8 POLS PS PS awose x x x x x x X x x x x X X X X X X X X X x X X X X X X X 55 oS 58 5 XY 5 X Trays 1 x x x UC ae Xx ee Assign paper X X X X xX X x swa o V Assign paper X X X X X X X X Eee _ 015 Software Technical Reference Driver features 133 Alternate source paper type Table 37 Driver support for alternate source paper type feature PF y All pages the X same Other pages Top bin face down Top bin face X Stapler X Straight paper path Installable options Table 39 Driver support for installable options Localization Table 40 Driver support for localization feature Windows XP 64 amp 32 Windows Pos PS Arabic Arabic X
246. ol is set to the MoreOften print jobs will use the value for this key to check the status of a print job Update job state every 10 seconds 1All values are default values WindowsSpoolerDSRates This section contains key and value pairs that control the update interval Printer Status and Alerts uses to query for the state of a print job within the context of the current computer spooler queue The values for each key are in terms of milliseconds Therefore a value of 1000 is the equivalent of 1 second The lower the status check rate value the more Software Technical Reference Engineering Detail 235 often the computer spooler queue is queried for the state of a print job See the LegacyPrinterDSRates section for similar update intervals Because the spooler queue resides on the local computer no networking is performed to get this state so these update intervals can be set fairly high 2 10 of second without affecting system performance An administrator could speed up lower the interval of or slow down increase the interval of these status check rates by modifying an HPSTATUS INI file and then replicate that file on all of the client systems This is done by copying the file to each client s WINDOWS directory or if the clients are running a shared version of Windows 95 Windows 98 or Windows Me then simply putting the HPSTATUS INI in the server s SYSTEM directory will suffice Table 100 WindowsSpoolerDSRates section
247. on activates the HP Network Registry Agent HPNRA and triggers the driver to recheck the registry for new information The HPNRA automatically updates the registry and changes the configuration information that appears on the Configuration tab in the Printer folder Note The bidirectional communication software necessary for the two methods of Driver Autoconfiguration described above is included in a Typical Installation when installing a network printer in supported environments The feature is also a selectable option for a Custom Installation e In environments that do not support bidirectional communication the driver automatically configures options based on the HP LaserJet 4200 or 4300 series printer bundle that is selected during the installation of the printing system software Configuration is based solely on the definition of the printer bundle e Enterprise AutoConfiguration is a version of bidirectional communication that provides autoconfiguration functionality for an Add Printer Wizard installation when you do not use autoselect An Add Printer Wizard installation that includes EAC is identical to other Add Printer installations except that when installation is complete the driver for the supported printer is configured with the same settings as the physical configuration of the device Configuration occurs without user interaction If bidirectional communication software has been installed previously EAC will not be activ
248. on the same partition as the operating system Software Technical Reference Installing Windows printing system components 137 Font support Basic fonts Microsoft Windows software includes these basic fonts which can be used with any HP printer e Arial e Courier New Italic e Times New Roman Italic e Arial Italic e Courier New Bold e Times New Roman Bold e Bold e Courier New Bold Italic e Times New Roman Bold Italic e Bold Italic e Symbol e Wingdings e Courier New e Times New Roman Default fonts The following default fonts are installed through a Typical Installation of the HP LaserJet printing system software Table 42 Default fonts o Fontame 138 Installing Windows printing system components Software Technical Reference Ninety two additional PS 3 fonts are also available the CD ROM Table 43 Additional PS 3 fonts Hienme O PS 12639 TTF Albertus MT PS 12640 TTF Albertus MT Italic bokr35wq TTF ITC Bookman Light bokr75w TTF ITC Bookman Demi bokr76w TTF ITC Bookman Demi Italic PS 14530 TTF Albertus MT Light PS 11120 TTF Antique Olive CompactPS PS 11119 TTF Antique Olive Roman Software Technical Reference Installing Windows printing system components 139 5_11846 5_24516 PS T2704 TTF PS 14508 TTF PS 12581 TTF PS_12585 1TF PS_12586 1TF 5_12582 PS24517 TTF
249. onnected printer The values for each key in terms of milliseconds Therefore a value of 1000 is the equivalent of 1 second The lower the status check rate value the more often the printer is queried for alerts See the LegacyPrinterDSRates section for similar update intervals An administrator could speed up lower the interval of or slow down increase the interval of these status check rates by modifying an HPSTATUS INI file and then replicate that file on all of the client systems This is done by copying the file to each client s WINDOWS directory or if the clients are running a shared version of Windows 95 Windows 98 or Windows Me then simply putting the HPSTATUS INI in the server s SYSTEM directory will suffice Table 101 PrinterAlertRates section LessO LessO Middle ften 300000 When the Status check rate slider control is set to the LessOften Printer Status and Alerts will use the value for this key to check the status of a direct connected printer checking for alerts Check for alerts every 5 minutes ftenPlusOne 120000 When the Status check rate slider control is set to the LessOftenPlusOne Printer Status and Alerts will use the value for this key to check the status of a direct connected printer checking for alerts Check for alerts every 2 minutes 60000 When the Status check rate slider control is set to the Middle Printer Status and Alerts will use the value for this key to check the stat
250. ontrols are unchanged and the button title changes to Save e Rename is the button title when you type something into the Name drop down menu after selecting an existing custom paper size from the drop down menu If no duplicate is found the name of the stored custom paper size changes to match the contents of the Name drop down menu Whenever the command button has the Rename title it is also the default button The following table illustrates the relationships between the Name drop down menu the command button and the actions that take users from one state to another Table 12 Name drop down menu text strings State Drop down menucontents Butionlabe Untied Save Select a saved item from the drop down menu 2 lt user typed text gt Click Save Type something into the Name drop down menu Change the width or height values Select a saved item from the drop down menu 3 name of saved item Delete Click Delete Type something into the Name drop down menu Change the width or height values Select a saved item from the drop down menu user typed text gt Click Rename when the name is unique i icate 74 Driver features Software Technical Reference Width and height controls The width and height values can be changed either by typing numeric strings into the edit boxes or by using the up and down arrows Any entry that is greater than the maximum limits of the width and height control is rounded down to
251. or configured manually It should look the same as the image that appears in the same location on the Paper tab and the Destination tab For more information see Paper tab features The printer image shown in the illustration might differ from your HP LaserJet 4200 or 4300 series printer depending on the model number and accessory devices that are installed Printer Model group box In the Printer Model group box the driver title remains HP LaserJet 4200 or HP LaserJet 4300 for all models Selection of another printer bundle makes the appropriate changes to other configuration options on the tab Software Technical Reference Driver features 85 When the HP LaserJet 4200 or the HP LaserJet 4300 is selected the following settings apply The Driver Work Space DWS value shown in the Other Options dialog box is 6 0 MB Total Printer Memory value is 48 MB e optional paper destinations paper sources duplexing unit or hard disk are selected When the HP LaserJet 4200n or the HP LaserJet 4300n is selected the following settings apply e Total Printer Memory value is 64 MB e Duplexing Unit is selected e optional paper destinations paper sources or hard disk are selected When the HP LaserJet 4200tn or the HP LaserJet 4300tn is selected the following settings apply Total Printer Memory value is 64 MB e Duplexing Unit is selected e 500 Sheet Input Tray is selected in Optional Paper Sou
252. ormation 85 Printer Status and Alerts support 233 problems using Printer Status and Alerts 244 Quick Sets 57 standalone 123 stream output mode support 127 types and sizes of media supported 204 user interface support 128 using older with new printers 49 Watermarks options 66 watermarks support 132 Index dual inline memory modules DIMMs status 39 duplex printing option in drivers 59 custom sizes 75 driver support 134 enabling in driver 120 enabling in driver 86 sources and destinations 203 DWS Driver Work Space 88 DWS Driver Work Space information 86 description 29 disabling 202 driver support 196 engineering detail 196 requirements for Windows 95 98 and Me 199 Windows NT 4 0 2000 and XP requirements 196 EconoMode 64 Effects tab in drivers 108 command and response 46 e mail alerts configuring 36 embedded Web server EWS See EWS embedded Web server availability by operating system 124 description 29 disabling 202 driver support 196 engineering detail 196 requirements for Windows 95 98 and Me 199 Windows NT 4 0 2000 and XP requirements 196 custom sizes 75 driver support 134 enabling in driver 87 input media supported 206 paper source commands 204 sources and destinations 203 envelope types and sizes supported 204 driver support 132 EPS support 127 errors configuring when displayed 234 paper source 204 paper type 207 euro characters 46 event log 30 and HP Web Access 30 configuring connection
253. orted features and attributes by nnne 205 Software Technical Reference 13 14 Table 92 Supported input media 206 Table 93 HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 Stacker and Stapler Stacker 206 Table 94 PCL and PCL 6 custom paper 5 2 5 207 Table 95 Paper type 5 207 Table 96 Printer Status and Alerts driver 233 Table 97 allprinters section etico ere ale rete ein eed 234 Table 98 refreshrate 234 Table 99 LegacyPrinterDSRates section 235 Table 100 WindowsSpoolerDSRates section sse 236 Table 101 PrinterAlertRates section 236 Table 102 EWSConnect section esses eene ener nennen 237 103 EostJob Timer sectl n 2 ierra npe Peri beri rns 237 Table 104 biditimeout Section e Ie dh e eet MW adh 237 Table 105 bidilevel 0 0 E ERANA T A REARS 237 Table 106 Problem nn 240 Table 107 Command line 243 Software Technical Reference List of figures Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 Figure 4 Figure 5 Figure 6 Figure 7 Figure 8 Device S
254. ot right click the Printer Status and Alerts tray icon and click Exit 4 Make sure that all other programs are closed 5 Type the command hpbdrvhk r of the Printer Goes 6 Type the command hpbdrvhk u of the Printer Goes You do not want Printer Status Remove the printer from the 1 Open a command prompt window and Alerts to track job status or Printer Status and Alerts list 2 Change directories so that the show device status for a specific current directory is the windows printer system directory For Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows Me systems it will typically be windows system for Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP systems it will be winnt system32 3 Type the command hpbdrvhk u of Printer Goes You do not want Printer Status Click the Options Icon and then Setting the Status check rate and Alerts to track job status or click Next so that the Status option to Never disables all print job check for device alerts any of check rate option appears in the tracking but still allows you to the printers but you do want to right panel Move the slider to the select one of the printer icons to get use the Device Status feature far left pointing to Never device status In the event that the administrator has hidden the Status check rate option and you cannot see this option complete the following steps Software Technical R
255. out the printer is retained and directed to the Solve a Problem Web site This site offers targeted support content and messages to help resolve problems as quickly as possible e Order Supplies Click this link to connect to an ordering page where you can order genuine HP supplies such as print cartridges and paper e Product Support This link connects you with an HP product support page from which you can search for information contact the HP customer care home page or find additional resources for your printer Settings tab The options on the left of the Settings tab are as follows e Configure Device 32 Software description Software Technical Reference e Alerts e Email e Security e Other Links e Device Information e Language e Time Services Remote printer configuration Printer configuration information can be obtained through a Web browser by opening the printer HP Web Access page and changing any of the basic configuration information on the Settings tab Security and password controls provide management information system managers with the level of control required within their environments The following illustration shows an example of printer options that can be configured remotely h hp LaserJet 4200 683 230 114 161 hp LaserJet 4200 invent Information Configure Device Configure Device INFORMATION 9 PAPER HANDLING S GONFIGURE DEVICE Other Links hp instant suppo
256. p always selects the corresponding tray in the Source Is option Manual Feed which is available from the Source is option cannot be selected by selecting the bitmap e On the Paper tab only input trays have printer image hot spots and be highlighted Output bins must be selected from the Destination tab Note The printer image shown in the following illustration might differ from your HP LaserJet 4200 or 4300 Hc EE series printer depending on the model number and accessory devices Software Technical Reference Driver features 69 8 5 by 11 inches Auto Select v Unspecified v Figure 20 Paper tab All Pages The controls on this mini tab are contained in an All Pages mini tab As the name implies this means that the settings specified on that mini tab apply to all pages of the document However when you select the Use different paper for first page check box the All Pages mini tab is replaced by three mini tabs These three mini tabs are First Page which contains the same controls as All Pages Other Pages which contains different controls as noted in the following sections Back Cover which also contains different controls as noted in the following sections 70 Driver features Software Technical Reference Other Pages Use the Other Pages mini tab to select an alternative media type or source for the pages that follow the first page of a document The choices and defaults for Source is and Type is ar
257. porarily 238 Printer Status and Alerts 238 installation requirements for Macintosh IBM OS 2 and Linux operating systems 173 installation requirements for Windows operating systems 137 disk storage status 39 description 168 engineering detail 195 document layout features driver support 129 Document Options in drivers 93 document preview image 56 Help feature support 128 installing online 26 localization 125 localization 126 localization 126 online availability by operating system 124 printer 26 Quick Set for use guide 58 double sided printing option in drivers 59 firmware 122 firmware 123 firmware 41 optional software 50 printing system software 122 printing system software 123 accessories supported 29 description 29 Driver Extensions information in drivers 84 description 168 driver support 128 engineering detail 195 Driver Support Matrix DMS file HPSASDRV MTX 239 Driver Work Space DWS 88 Driver Work Space DWS information 86 About tab 118 accessibility support 128 adding and removing for Printer Status and Alerts 238 Adobe PS Level 3 92 Advanced tab 93 All Pages tab 70 availability by operating system 124 availability for IBM operating systems 50 availability for Linux operating systems 50 availability for UNIX operating systems 50 Basics tab 83 bidirectional communication support 127 changing in printer object for IBM operating systems 193 Configure tab 85 configuring for printer hard disk 78 connectivity support 1
258. ppears when you put the cursor on the option button The options on your printer might vary from the illustration Install Printer This wizard guides you through the installation of your HP LaserJet printing system You are given the choice of performing a Typical Installation or a Custom Installation If you select Typical Installation only the necessary software will be installed If you select Custom Installation you can select the components you want to install Software Technical Reference Software description 47 Note Register Product This option can be used to register your HP LaserJet 4200 or 4300 series printer now and to receive the following information at no cost e notification of driver updates e technical support updates e news about emerging technologies View Documentation This option can be used to view the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers documentation The following document options are available e Readme e User s Guide HP Jetdirect Guide e Release Notes For systems that do not have Adobe Acrobat Reader 4 0 or later installed you will be given the option to download that software Clicking any of the links to documentation that is provided in the Adobe Acrobat PDF file format opens a dialog box from which you can install Adobe Acrobat Reader software from the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 software CD ROMs Customization Utility This utility can be used to create a custom software install
259. printer drivers The 05 2 drivers are available from and are packaged with OS 2 e UNIX model scripts Go to http www hp com support net printing and then select hp printer installation software for further information about UNIX drivers e Linux drivers Go to http www hp com go linux for further information about Linux drivers for HP LaserJet printers or to http hp sourceforge net HP Linux support home page Macintosh components e LaserJet PPDs for past projects e Screen fonts Additional productivity tools HP Web Registration You can use this component to register your HP LaserJet printer on the HP Web site or through e mail After you have successfully installed the software the installer prompts you to register your HP LaserJet printer Also you can gain access to HP Web Registration from the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 software CD ROMs by clicking Register Product You can choose to complete the online registration at that time or later If you want to register your printer later click Register Product from the HP LaserJet program group when you decide to complete your registration Optional software The HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 software CD ROMs provide links to download and install HP Web JetAdmin as optional software HP Web JetAdmin Use HP Web JetAdmin to manage HP Jetdirect connected printers within your intranet by using a browser HP Web JetAdmin is a browser based management tool and should be i
260. prompt window 2 Change directories so that the current directory is the windows system directory For Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows Me systems it will typically be windows system for Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP systems it will be winnt system32 3 Make sure Printer Status and Alerts is closed If it is not right click the Printer Status and Alerts tray icon and choose Exit 4 Type the command hpbdrvhk i a 5 Restart the system The HPBDRVHI EXE utility In general the HPBDRVHK EXE can be used to solve various problems The following is a list of the command line options that are available to the support utility along with their meaning Table 107 Command line options Command Line Option Sampe 3 Meaning 3 hpbdrvhk e Enumerates all printers installed on the computer hpbdrvhk h Enumerates all printers installed on the computer that Printer Status and Alerts is currently tracking print jobs for or has hooked hpbdrvhk u My 8100 Uninstall Printer Status and Alerts support for the specified printer hpbdrvhk u a Uninstall Printer Status and Alerts support for all printers hpbdrvhk i a Install Printer Status and Alerts support for all printers that use a driver model that is supported by Printer Status and Alerts hpbdrvhk s My 9000 Adds the driver model name used by the specified i ae printer to the driver support matrix file Software Technical Ref
261. pture Protocol Preferences Service Location Advanced Settings Advanced Menu Settings Client Location Profiles Advanced Login Contextless Login ETETEN Palicy Path and Filename IE ystems Show on login Location List v Advanced Button Variables Button Clear Connections Iv workstation Orly Suppress Single Sign on for this Login Welcome screen Bitmap Filename NWELCOMEBMP Caption 000 Figure 93 Novell Client Configuration dialog box 12 The setup is now complete To close the window click OK 13 Right click the red icon located in the system tray and then click NetWare Login to log on to the server again The Location field appears The drop down menu contains two fields Default the NDS login and Bindery Select Bindery and then continue the normal login process 14 Once you have logged in confirm the connections see Determining the server connection and make sure the printer is connected in a bindery mode Software Technical Reference Engineering Detail 213 Using Jet Admin 3 42 4 2 to build Novell queues Internal After Jet Admin has been installed open the program and select the Options menu and then click Preferences Note The Novell Client software must be installed before HP Jet Admin 7 HP JetAdmin Utility xi Device NetWare View Tools Device Refresh Options Help e 2 gg 55 55 55 55 a 55 55 55 55 g 55 55 5
262. r object 2 Click Settings 3 Click the Printer Driver tab 4 Double click the Titlebar icon The printer object is now set up to use a different printer driver To customize the settings for this printer driver see Changing the printer properties or Changing the job properties Changing the printer properties Printer properties describe how a particular printer is physically set up Examples of printer properties include the amount of memory in a printer forms defined by the printer forms associated with the printer paper trays and installed printer patterns To set or change printer properties Point to the Printer object Right click the Printer object Click Settings Click the Printer Driver tab Right click the correct printer driver Click Settings Change the properties to match the printer setup 7 Double click the Titlebar icon The printer object is now set up to print a job For information about how to print a job see the OS 2 tutorial or the information folder for information about printing Changing the job properties Job properties describe how a particular print job is printed Examples of job properties include number of copies print resolution print quality and orientation portrait or landscape Programs generally allow the selection of a printer object and they allow you to change the job properties associated with a particular job by selecting setup or options buttons Under ce
263. r when you want to run the installation without being prompted You also have the option of creating a custom disk image that contains specific drivers and utilities allowing users to run the installer without further interaction Silent installation can be performed in two ways e customized silent installer e command line silent installer Customized silent installer Use this option to select the printing system components to include in the silent installation You can select the operating system language printer models drivers utilities and documentation to install Driver Management and Configuration Utility Internal Driver Management and Configuration DMC is a software architecture and set of tools that permits HP and third party software to be customized and distributed within managed corporate printing environments It provides network administrators with the capability to preconfigure printer drivers and other printing software and manage that software on client workstations remotely With DMC customized printer settings can be retained during driver updates rather than be replaced with the default settings of the new driver Command line silent install This method cannot be customized It installs only the printing system components that are included in the Typical Installation Note Values that follow equal signs in a command line must not contain intervening spaces 168 Installing Windows printing system compo
264. rces e optional paper destinations are selected When the HP LaserJet 4200dtn or the HP LaserJet 4300 is selected the following settings apply e Total Printer Memory value is 64 MB e Duplexing Unit is selected e Mopier Enabled is selected e Printer Hard Disk is selected e 2 500 Sheet Input Tray is selected When the HP LaserJet 4200dtns or the HP LaserJet 4300 is selected the following settings apply Total Printer Memory value is 64 MB e Duplexing Unit is selected e Mopier Enabled is selected e Printer Hard Disk is selected e 2 500 Sheet Input Tray is selected When the HP LaserJet 4200atnsl or the HP LaserJet 4300dtnsl is selected the following settings apply Total Printer Memory value is 64 e Duplexing Unit is selected e Mopier Enabled is selected e Printer Hard Disk is selected e 2x 500 Sheet Input Tray is selected Paper handling options The Paper Handling Options group box provides options for configuring most of the paper handling device features Duplexing unit Select this option if a duplexing unit is installed in the printer When it is selected additional controls appear in the Document Options group box on the Finishing tab Unlike most options in this group box the Duplexing Unit option 86 Driver features Software Technical Reference does not affect the printer image because the duplexing unit is contained within the printer
265. re not restored The Defaults setting appears automatically if no other driver settings have been changed since the driver was installed or if all driver settings match the original settings Otherwise the setting in the Quick Sets menu will be the same label that appeared when you last closed the printing Properties dialog box by clicking OK The following table shows the default settings for Quick Sets See Driver Management Configuration DMC for information about preconfigurable DMC settings Table 9 Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers Driver feature US English Quick Sets Other language default DMC Preconfigurable am qa a 3 Booketpining Sgle Of lY Pagespershet o o Y SyS Printpageborder Pageorder Rightihendom y Pmmquaiy Besqully Y KS KR ee E EconoMode Current setting PCL6 This is the Faster PCL5e This is the Best Printing setting al setting Rendering mode Rendering mode Automatic le eU Printtextasblack text as Eu Off TrueType as bitmaps Off send TrueType fonts on as outlines Print document on Off print on size specified Y in Paper tab Size to print on Scale to fi eM e ofnormalsize
266. rences between remote client operating systems go to http www hp com cposupport printers support doc bpl10248 html Technology background information This section contains information about the following topics Software Technical Reference Software description 25 HP LaserJet user documentation e Bidirectional communication e Driver Autoconfiguration e Web Access e Printer Status and Alerts e Remote firmware update e Euro character HP LaserJet user documentation Adobe R Acrobat Reader R Note The HP LaserJet software compact disk read only memory CD ROM includes Adobe Acrobat Reader version 5 0 version 4 05c for Russian for viewing online documentation When you click any of the documentation links on the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 software CD ROMs the installer scans the system for an installed Portable Document Format PDF reader If the installer cannot find a reader the installer presents the option to install the Adobe Acrobat Reader Adobe Acrobat Reader 4 0 or later is required to view the documents on the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 software CD ROMs HP LaserJet guides On the CD ROM that came with the printers the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 User Guide is supplied in Adobe Acrobat Reader PDF files for viewing on your computer You can either view the guides from the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 software CD ROMs or install them on your system To install the online user guides select the User Guid
267. rinter and Printer Status and Alerts then complete the following additional steps Repeat steps 1 through 4 above Type the command hpbdrvhk c Name of the Printer Goes Here Repeat step 11 for each printer name that was used originally in the steps 1 through 4 Restart the system Engineering Detail Software Technical Reference If you still having problems then continue with the following steps 14 Repeat steps 1 through 4 above 15 the command hpbdrvhk u a 16 Type the command hpbdrvhk a 17 Choose the Start Run menu and type in REGEDIT 18 Browse to HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Software Hewlett Packard HPSpoolerlmportFixup 19 Delete any subkeys that have a printer driver model name such as HP LaserJet 8150 PS 20 Delete all values except these three if they are present NewlmportModule ReplacerModule NewlmportModuleUM 21 Inthe registry editor browse to HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE System CurrentControlSet Control Print Environments 22 If this is a Windows 95 Windows 98 or Windows Me system proceed to the steps for Windows 95 Windows 98 or Windows Me 23 If this is a Windows NT 4 0 system proceed to the steps for Windows NT 4 0 24 If this is a Windows 2000 or Windows XP system proceed to the steps for Windows NT 4 0 and then complete the steps for Windows 2000 and Windows XP For Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows Me 1 Inthe registry editor select the Windows 4 0 Drivers key 2 Select the first
268. rinters and then click Continue From the list of HP Devices select the printers to be updated or click Select All Click Update to install the new firmware Printer messages during firmware upgrade The printer shows three messages during a normal update process 44 Software description Software Technical Reference Table 5 Update messages Explanation RECEIVING UPGRADE This message appears from the time the printer recognizes the beginning of an RFU update until the time the printer has verified the validity and integrity of the RFU update UPGRADING PRINTER This message appears while the printer is actually reprogramming the firmware AIT FOR PRINTER TO REINITIALIZE This message appears from the time the printer has finished reprogramming the DIMM until the printer reinitializes Note To verify that the firmware update succeeded print a new configuration page from the printer control 7777 22 panel and verify that the firmware datecode shown on the configuration page has changed Troubleshooting a firmware update The following table lists causes and results of possible interruptions to the firmware update Table 6 Troubleshooting a firmware update Case The job was cancelled from the printer control panel No update has occurred A break in the stream occurred during send for No update has occurred example the parallel cable was removed A power cycle occurred during RECEIVING No update
269. rinting system and installer HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 software CD ROMs for Windows systems Note In previous versions of the printing system software the installer was started by locating and running the SETUP EXE file For the Microsoft Windows environment Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP the HP LaserJet software CD ROM provides an interactive software window that you can use not only to install the printer drivers and related components but also to gain access to online product registration user documentation a customization utility Adobe Acrobat Reader software and optional HP software The following illustration shows the main screen of the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 software CD ROMs which appears when you insert the printing software CD ROM in your CD ROM drive If the screen does not appear when you insert the CD ROM click Start click Run click Browse navigate to the root directory of the CD ROM and then double click the SETUP EXE file to start the CD ROM hp LaserJet 4200 CD Browser View the hp LaserJet 4200 printer documentation Install Printer Register Product iew Documentation Customization Utili Optional Software EXIT Figure 10 Installation software CD ROM main screen The HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 software CD ROMs contain the following options The text that follows each of the following options is approximately the same text that a
270. riptions Installing Items remaining to be installed conditional This dialog box shows installation number progress No action is required unless you Installing HP LaserJet XXXX Series wish to stop the installation Click the Stop Stop button button to interrupt the install file copy process Quit to leave the Installer lf you wish to perform additional installations click Continue Cmm Figure 78 Installation was successful dialog box Installation was successful If you are finished click Table 74 Installation successful dialog text strings itle of dialog box Text in dialog box User Options and Descriptions Installation was successful If you are Click the Quit button to exit the Installer finished click Quit to leave the Installer If The Printer Setup Assistant opens Click the Continue button to return to the HP LaserJet Installer you wish to perform additional installations click Continue Software Technical Reference Installation for Macintosh IBM OS 2 and Linux operating systems 183 Printer setup using AppleTalk Chooser This section provides information about installing the printer using the AppleTalk Chooser Important To set up your hp LaserJet printer use one of the following methods AppleTalk Open the Chooser the menu and select o printer USB LPR Open the Desktop Printer Utility and select a printer Figure 79 Important dialog box Table
271. river Management and Configuration Utility 168 Command line silent E 168 Method 1 Command nnnm anna ada da aa dana 44 169 Method 2 SETUPJEST ihre t eut Fe d ete Pre aot era ave 169 DriverOnly any np 169 Point and Print installation for Windows 95 98 Me NT 4 0 2000 and 170 Setting a default 171 vassicestunancac 171 ES 171 5 Installation for Macintosh 05 2 and Linux operating systems c 173 System 173 Macintoshiin REPE 173 5 2 P eaaa 173 Biber E 173 O 174 Macintosh component 174 cade 174 PDES Mac OS EE 174 HP EaserJet Utility tbt eee etre repe entre te Ebert ri dte e
272. river versions The HP LaserJet printing solution for Macintosh is composed of the Apple LaserWriter driver which is provided with the operating system and HP created PPD files The driver uses these files to determine the features and PS commands that the printer supports Bidirectional support in AppleTalk and USB connections supports autoconfiguration of the software The installable components are e the HP LaserJet Installer for Mac OS 8 and Mac OS 9 e the HP LaserJet Installer for Mac OS X e HP LaserJet Screen Fonts Installer e SYSTEM EXTENSIONS PRINTER DESCRIPTIONS for Mac OS 8 and Mac OS 9 Software Technical Reference Software description 49 e LIBRARY PRINTERS PPDS CONTENTS RESOURCES LANGUAGE LPROJ for Mac OS X e HP LaserJet Utility an HP printer utility that is installed in the HP LaserJet folder of Mac OS 8 and Mac OS 9 It provides configuration and management support for PS and PCL printers e online Help an HTML based printer and utility help that can be viewed through a browser or in the Macintosh OS Help Center e HP Auto Setup Utility installed in the Startup Items folder of Mac OS 8 and later versions It provides assistance to set up the new printer then moves itself to Trash e installation notes Additional driver availability Additional drivers are available from your Hewlett Packard distributor or from the Web site These drivers are e OS 2 PCL 5e OS 2 PS OS 2 PCL 6
273. rnet Explorer can be installed after installing Printer Status and Alerts e When renaming a driver job and device status will not be tracked until the computer is restarted e Drivers added after Printer Status and Alerts is installed are not recognized until the computer is restarted e Clicking the Cancel button in the Printer Status and Alerts window will not always cancel a job This button sends a cancel request to the printer but if the job has already been processed it might not be possible to cancel the job this is commonly the case with smaller jobs e When using Printer Status and Alerts with Microsoft printer sharing the following items apply e Microsoft patch Vredir is required if you want to use Printer Status and Alerts a Windows 98 or Windows Me computer for a printer that has been shared directly from a computer with Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP installed Failure to install the patch could cause an intermittent blue screen to appear on the client computer e Microsoft shared printers the host system must have either Printer Status and Alerts or the HP Driver Autoconfiguration option from the HP installer on the computer Load Printer Status and Alerts on the computer sharing the printer before loading Printer Status and Alerts on the client computer e Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows Me client computers that have Printer Status and Alerts installed installing a printer by
274. rs in the second field Printer JetDirect Select the printer you want to associate with the printer agent Click OK 12 In the next window Select Printer Drivers three or four tabs appear that list the various Microsoft Window OS types W3 1 W95 98 WNT4 and or W2k This is where you select the driver that you want to send to workstations that connect to the printer agent 13 Select each tab for the OS type that will be attaching to the printer and search for the name of the driver that you installed earlier through the RMS The default is None 14 After making your selections click Continue Software Technical Reference Engineering Detail 231 15 An information window appears informing you of the drivers you selected You can either click Cancel and redo the selection or click OK to continue Clicking OK closes all windows and return you to the NetWare Administrator Screen 16 The newly created Printer Agent object appears at the top of the context list under which you built the object ZENworks 2 0 Internal Making user policies Internal User policies are created to send the drivers and associate the policy queues with the printer agent Note de 65 B3 cx Build an NDS Queue for each user first You must use ZENworks version 2 or later for this process Create a user policy for the specific user and then enable the printer policy If you do not see the Policy icon when trying to create the user policy you must instal
275. rsions The following table lists the three versions of the software CD ROM along with the languages each version supports Table 18 CD ROM versions CD ROM version Languages supported Americas Dutch Nederland English French Fran ais German Deutsch Hebrew Italian Italiano Portuguese Portugu s Brazilian Spanish Espa ol English Chinese Simplified Chinese Traditional Korean Japanese Thai Rest of world Arabic Czech Cesky Danish Dansk English Finnish Suomi French Fran ais Hungarian Magyar Norwegian Norsk Polish Polski Russian Russ Swedish Svenska Turkish Turkce Web ordering The HP LaserJet software CD ROM and related software CD ROMs can be ordered from the http www hp com go 114200 software and http www hp com go 1j4300 software Web sites The links for ordering the CD ROMs appear on these pages 122 Driver features Software Technical Reference Web deployment Software and firmware to support HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers are available for download from the following Web sites http www hp com go lj4200 software http www hp com go lj4300 software http www hp com go lj4200 firmware http www hp com go lj4300 firmware This is the preferred method for obtaining the latest software and firmware The Web sites offers a notification option for automatic e mail notification about new software and firmware releases Printing system software
276. rt Order Supplies Product Support Figure 3 Configure Device Some configuration tasks cannot be performed remotely because printed pages must be examined Software Technical Reference Software description 33 Networking tab The following illustration shows the Network Settings option on the HP Web Access Networking tab D NPI27D3F1 163 230 114 161 eem hp LaserJet 4200 _Home Networking IPXISPX AppleTalk DLC LLC SNMP 9 General Settings Advanced Settings IP Configuration Method DHCP Manual Note change in IP Address will result in loss of connectivity to the Browser Host Name NPI27D3F1 IP Address 183 230 114 161 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 63 230 114 1 Domain Name E Primary WINS Server 63 230 114 17 Secondary WINS Server 209 189 222 135 Syslog Server Not Specified l Syslog Maximum Messages 10 Syslog Priority 8 r Figure 4 Networking tab The menu on the left of the screen contains other networking options under three categories configuration security and diagnostics Configuration e Network Settings e PP Internet Printing Protocol e Support Info Security e Admin Password A Access Control 34 Software description Software Technical Reference Diagnostics e Network Statistics e Protocol Info e Test Page e Refresh Rate Network settings
277. rtain conditions it is appropriate to change job properties outside of a software program such as when performing drag and drop printing To change the default job properties associated with a printer object outside of an program Right click the Printer object Click Settings Click the Job Properties tab Change the properties 5 Click Save The default job properties associated with a printer object are now set up For more information about how to print a job see the OS 2 tutorial or the information folder E d Software Technical Reference Installation for Macintosh IBM OS 2 and Linux operating systems 193 194 Installation for Macintosh OS 2 and Linux operating systems Software Technical Reference Engineering Detail Introduction This section presents engineering detail for the following topics e Driver Management and Configuration Utility Internal e Enterprise AutoConfiguration Internal e Media attributes e Network administrator software Internal e Printer Status and Alerts Internal Driver Management and Configuration Utility Internal Driver Management and Configuration DMC is a software architecture and set of tools that permits HP and third party software to be customized and distributed within managed corporate printing environments It provides network administrators with the capability to preconfigure printer drivers and other printing software and manage that software on
278. s Determining the server connection bindery versus NDS Internal The following procedure is used to determine the type of connection you have with the Novell server if you already have a Novell client installed 1 Right click the red Novell icon N in the System Tray 2 Inthe pop up menu click NetWare Connections A new window appears showing the tree and the server connection you might be connected to more than one tree or more than one server The type of connection also appears under Authentication State If it is a bindery connection the word Bindery appears Otherwise the words Directory Services appear indicating that it is an NDS connection Note If you are connected in bindery mode only a server connection appears not a tree Installing the Novell Client bindery and NDS Default Internal The Novell Client software can be installed on the client computer using bindery mode or NDS mode If you click Typical the Novell Client software installs NDS mode automatically If you click Custom the screen in the following illustration appears after the IP IPX selection screen Note The screens that appear when installing the Windows XP client might differ in details from the following illustration 208 Engineering Detail Software Technical Reference Login Authentic ator Novell To establish an NDS connection during login select NDS To establish bindery connechon select Bindery NOS Nel dx
279. s can be installed on this computer to support automatic diver download to clients hy Install a Windows 95 98 Me driver Install a Windows NT 4 0 driver Figure 64 Printer Sharing dialog box Note When you do not share the printer additional driver support is not available If you share the printer on n Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP operating systems by selecting Share as you must type a name You can also provide additional printer driver support for other operating systems Table 59 Printer Sharing dialog box text strings itle of dialog box Text in dialog box User options and descriptions Printer Sharing Indicate whether this printer will be shared Next starts the file copy process with other network users If you choose Back returns you to the Printer Name sharing give the printer a share name dialog box Not shared option button Cancel takes you to the Exit Setup dialog Share as text entry field box NOTE Exceeding 7 characters may make the printer inaccessible to Windows 95 98 Me clients A share will be created for each driver type using the name specified above Example LJ 7900 Client Driver Support Additional drivers can be installed on this computer to support automated driver download to clients Install a Windows 95 98 Me driver check box Software Technical Reference Installing Windows printing system components 157 Finish j x
280. s stored in the printer s hard disk you can print the job at the printer control panel Nothing will be printed until the job is requested at the printer control panel The job remains stored on the printer until it is deleted or overwritten by a document with the same user and job names Stored jobs remain on the printer hard disk when power is interrupted Use this feature for forms and other common or shared documents A stored job can be handled in two ways as either a private or a public job If you create a private stored job a print job is sent directly to the printer memory and can be printed only after you type a PIN at the printer control panel You can set the PIN in the Print dialog box After the job is printed the job remains in the printer memory and can be printed again from the printer control panel This feature is useful when you are printing sensitive or confidential documents that you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing Private mode is initiated by selecting the Require PIN to Print check box In this mode you have to type a PIN at the control panel to release the job The box labeled PIN is usually inactive The Require PIN to Print option is activated if you click Stored Job If the Require PIN to Print option is selected you must type a PIN to make the stored job private A private stored job is not the same as a private job see above Private jobs are deleted from the printer memory after they are prin
281. s used for two reasons e ltenables the bidirectional communication component to be distributed with the driver in a Point and Print vend remotely install scenario Only files in the driver directory are vended e It provides an independent location from which to run bidirectional communication in the event that an incompatible version is already installed on the system INF changes CopyFiles HPBF4121 FILES AUTOCFG FILES HPAUTO FILES AUTOCFG FILES HPNRA EX HPNRA EXE HPBOID EX HPBOID EXE HPBPRO EX HPBPRO EXE HPPAPMLO EX HPPAPMLO EXE HPBNRAC2 DL HPBNRAC2 DLL HPBMIAPI DL HPBMIAPI DLL HPBOIDPS DL HPBOIDPS DLL HPBPROPS DL HPBPROPS DLL HPJCMN2U DL HPJCMN2U DLL HPJIPX1U DL HPJIPX1U DLL HPPAPTSO DL HPPAPTSO DLL HPPASNMO DL HPPASNMO DLL DestinationDirs DefaultDestDir 66000 HPBF4121 FILES 66000 AUTOCFG_FILES 66000 HPAUTO_FILES 66000 SourceDisksFiles x86 HPBF412E DL_ 1 HPBF412F DL_ 1 Software Technical Reference Engineering Detail 197 HPBF412G DL_ 1 HPBF412H DL_ 1 HPBF4121 PM_ 1 HPBF4121 DL 1 HPBF4121 HL 1 HPBF412J DL 1 HPBF412K DL 1 HPDCMON DL 1 HPBAFD32 DL 1 HPBFTMS2 DL 1 HPNRA EX 1 HPBOID EX 1 HPBPRO EX 1 HPPAPMLO EX 1 HPBNRAC2 DL 1 HPBMIAPI DL 1 HPBOIDPS DL 1 HPBPROPS DL 1 HPJCMN2U DL_ 1 HPJIPX1U DL_ 1 HPPAPTSO DL_ 1 HPPASNMO DL 1 Adding mini installer files 198 The mini installer files consist of the mini installer DLL always called HPBMINI DLL for NT based pl
282. sage ONE FILE COPIED SUCCESSFULLY appears on the computer screen Remote firmware update for UNIX systems Any method that delivers the RFU file to the printer will work including cp home yourmachine FILENAME dev parallel where home yourmachine FILENAME contains the RFU file Remote firmware update using FTP on a direct network connection Note If your HP LaserJet 4200 or 4300 series printer uses a direct network connection you can use file transfer protocol FTP to update your HP LaserJet firmware Complete the following steps 1 Take note of the TCP IP address on the EIO JetDirect page this is the second page of the Configuration Page printout To print a configuration page see Determining the current level of firmware Before connecting to the printer make sure that the printer is not in PowerSave mode Also make sure that any error messages are cleared from the control panel display 2 Open a MS DOS command window on your computer Type lt PRINTER ADDRESS for example if the TCP IP address is 192 168 0 90 type FTP 192 168 0 90 Press ENTER on the keyboard When prompted for user name and password press ENTER for each Type BIN at the gt prompt Press ENTER Type put lt path gt where lt path gt is the location where the RFU file was downloaded from the Web For example type PUT CALJLJFW RFU and then press ENTER The download process begins and the firmware is update
283. se the right mouse button Type a name for the printer in the Name field Select a port to which the printer is connected Click Install new printer driver A window appears with a list of the printer drivers that are shipped with OS 2 Click Other printer driver Point to the downloaded printer drivers 10 Click Refresh Wait until the window fills with printer drivers 11 Select a driver by clicking the left mouse button over the driver that you want 12 Click Install Installing a printer in OS 2 with pre existing printer object on desktop To install a new printer driver using an existing printer object use the following procedure Note If the 16 bit HP LaserJet driver is installed on a system delete it before installing this driver Use these directions if a printer object exists on the OS 2 desktop but you do not have the correct printer driver installed on the system This could happen if a different printer has been added to the system 1 ON OO CQ Iv 9 Right click the Printer object Click Settings Click the Printer Driver tab Right click one of the Printer Driver objects Click Install Click Other OS 2 printer driver Point to the downloaded printer drivers Click the Refresh button Wait until the window fills with printer drivers Click the driver that you want to use 10 Click Install Additional information about the OS 2 drivers is included in the readme files that come with each driver Font s
284. serJet 4200 or 4300 series _ 2 printer depending on the model number and the installed accessory devices Software Technical Reference Driver features 77 Ej hp LaserJet 4200 PCL 6 Properties 2 x Finishing Effects Paper Destination Basics m Quick Sets Untitled X Destination Features Job Storage Settings 8 5 by 11 inches Output Bin Options Bin Top Bin Face Down Options None r Figure 24 Destination tab Destination Features The Destination Features group box provides controls for Job Storage This group box is only visible if the Printer Hard Disk and Job Storage Enabled check boxes are selected in the More Configuration Options dialog box that is available on the Configure tab Hardware configuration and availability of Job Storage options The Job Storage options available to you depends on whether your printer has an optional hard disk installed Some Job Storage options require a printer hard disk an optional HP EIO disk drive The Quick Copy and Stored Job options require the installation of a printer hard disk To use all four of the Job Storage options the printer must have the optional hard disk installed the Printer Hard Disk selected in the More dialog box of the Configure tab and the print driver configured to use hard disk storage Configuring the printer driver for a printer hard disk If th
285. serJet software CD ROM Windows partition Directory structure The files contained in the Windows partition of the HP LaserJet software CD ROM grouped by language reside in the following directories e Root directory e Drivers directory e Fonts directory e Manuals directory e Reader directory e Setup File layouts differ according to language for the European and Asian versions of the software CD ROM To view the files insert the HP LaserJet printing system software CD ROM right click Start click Explore and then select the CD ROM drive HP LaserJet software CD ROM Macintosh Partition The files contained in the Macintosh partition of the HP LaserJet software CD ROM grouped by language reside in the following directories e Root directory e HP LASERJET INSTALLERS for Macintosh operating systems e PDF for guides and manuals File layouts differ according to language for the European and Asian versions of the software CD ROM Software Technical Reference Driver features 121 Availability and fulfillment This section provides information about the availability of the HP LaserJet printing system software and related software and firmware Software is available on CD ROM from HP fulfillment centers or can be downloaded from the Web at the following URL http wWwww hp com go 1j4200 software http Wwww hp com go lj4300 software In box CD ROMs The HP LaserJet software CD ROM is available in three regional ve
286. software technical reference hp LaserJet 4200 4300 hp LaserJet 4200 4300 series printers software technical reference Copyright Hewlett Packard Company 2002 All Rights Reserved Reproduction adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited except as allowed under the copyright laws Edition 1 11 2002 Hewlett Packard Company 11311 Chinden Boulevard Boise Idaho 83714 U S A Warranty The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice Hewlett Packard makes no warranty of any kind with respect to this information HEWLETT PACKARD SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Hewlett Packard shall not be liable for any direct indirect incidental consequential or other damage alleged in connection with the furnishing or use of this information Trademark Credits Adobe Adobe Photoshop Acrobat PostScript and the Acrobat logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries regions Arial is a U S registered trademark of the Monotype Corporation AutoCAD TM is a U S trademark of Autodesk Inc CorelDraw TM is a trademark of Corel Corporation or Corel Corporation Ltd Helvetica and Times are trademarks of Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries in the U S and other countries reg
287. ss the select button 4 Press the up and down buttons to scroll to DELETE The DELETE selection might have an icon next to it indicating that the job is locked If so type the PIN number and then press the select button Output bin options The Output Bin Options group box contains a drop down menu that you can use to select from a list of configured output bins Only output bins that are configured on the Configure tab appear in this drop down menu Note When using the face down output bin you must manually switch the bin between face down and face P nt up output Depending on the bundle and the driver configurations the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers offer the following optional output devices Software Technical Reference Driver features 81 e Stacker Bin Stapler It provides single position stapling for up to 15 sheets of paper per document and stacking for up to 500 sheets of unstapled paper e Stacker Bin It provides stacking for up to 500 sheets of paper Options The Options drop down menu is inactive This setting can be used to enable non HP paper handling devices Printer image The bitmap image in the lower right portion of the Destination tab represents the current physical configuration of the printer according to the driver configuration data obtained automatically through bidirectional communication or configured manually through the driver It should have the same appearance as the image in the
288. t 133 Paper tab in drivers 69 paper trays See trays paper type commands 207 driver support 133 driver support 133 Paper Output option in drivers 93 Paper Quality tab in drivers 102 bidirectional communication support 127 driver support 127 passwords configuring 34 bidirectional communication support 127 connectivity support 127 constraints support 129 document layout features support 129 Driver Management and Configuration DMC support 128 GPD generic printer description 124 Help feature support 128 installable options support 134 job storage support 130 job stream output support 127 localization support 134 print controls support 130 stream output mode support 127 types and sizes of media supported 204 Unidriver 124 251 user interface support 128 watermarks support 132 Driver Management and Configuration DMC support 196 escape sequence for paper type 207 description 49 EAC Enterprise AutoConfiguration support 196 escape sequence for paper source 204 features for Windows 2000 and XP 97 features for Windows 95 98 Me and NT 4 0 53 localization 125 paper source commands 204 Printer Status and Alerts support 233 Unidriver 124 bidirectional communication support 127 connectivity support 127 constraints support 129 description 49 document layout features support 129 Driver Management and Configuration DMC support 128 Driver Management and Configuration DMC support 196 EAC Enterprise AutoConfiguration support 1
289. t a PPD file click the Printer Model pop up menu select HP and then click LaserJet 4200 or LaserJet 4300 5 Click Add 6 To configure installable options in Mac OS X 10 2 such as a duplexing unit or optional paper trays click the appropriate printer icon in the Print Center Printer List window Select Show Info from the Printers menu and then select the appropriate options from the Installable Options popup menu 7 Configure the options and then click Apply Changes Uninstalling the Macintosh printing system To uninstall the Macintosh Printing System drag the PPDs and the unwanted component s to Trash In box disk layout The Macintosh Printing System consists of one file the HP LaserJet Installer Integrated installer program Folders and files added through installation of the HP LaserJet software Macintosh OS The tables in the following sections detail the changes to your system as new folders and files are added when the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printer software is installed on Macintosh OS systems Note This listing does not include temporary directories and files that are created and then deleted during X CC the installation process In the following listing MACINTOSH HD indicates the drive on which the software was installed Software Technical Reference Installation for Macintosh IBM OS 2 and Linux operating systems 179 Macintosh Macintosh OS Classic installation This section provides informat
290. t eevee 66 9e of Normal Size Options e re Pet em a 66 te EE Ia ede oti adu a ei es 66 C rrent Watermarks dici end edi x eee e dade pe aei dade rc een peo dd dee hs 67 Watermark Messagi 68 Message angle E NN 68 Fonta MDE TEL aE ARE E 68 E 68 emu 68 oto ete tutae be estet Avi terc 68 EA E A TAE e E ds sb 69 D faut Mikio aioe Ae e ei tdi 69 Paperitab Teatul es ote to t a te e e m A e RE dt 69 ao tne t REOR RIEN PO IR DRIED 69 DUBIE 70 Other Pages neat di Rte d acus doe ev dd Pet a ect ee el 71 Back Govern idt iR et dta et dtc 71 Simp 72 GUSTO ees LEE 73 tm hebt c eg taba eco ete en co 73 Dynamic command button rd D RUE eet eH DER RR IRE UR EET E 74 Width and height controls nnn rrr enne 75 Custom width and height control limits 75 Paper and envelope ICOrls ee neben ene reiten Feo nee Eg ev de Db tein Ero 75 Measurement Units DUttOri eicere ment cin eee rea eet ce rd e Re 75 Glose DUON e
291. t losing the name However if a saved paper size name is selected from the drop down menu any unsaved name or size values are lost without warning and replaced by the values of the selected custom paper size Dynamic command button The button located to the right of the Name drop down menu has three possible labels Save Delete and Rename e Save is the button title whenever the height and width values have been changed since the last save or since the selection of an existing custom paper size Clicking the button causes the name in the Name drop down menu to be compared against each of the saved names If a duplicate is found a dialog box appears asking if it is okay to replace the existing item If you click Yes the old item is updated with the new values If you click No the driver returns to the Custom Paper Size dialog box where you can type a different name The new name is compared only against the list of user defined custom paper names and not against the standard paper size names Whenever the command button has the Save title it is the default button e Delete is the button title whenever the name of an existing previously saved custom paper size appears in the Name drop down menu such as immediately after selecting an item from the drop down menu or clicking the Save button Clicking the Delete button causes the saved custom paper size to be deleted after which the Name drop down menu changes to Untitled the height and width c
292. t the default Windows resolution use the scroll bar indicator to approximate the desired value and then use the scroll bar arrows to refine the value Software Technical Reference Driver features 109 The following settings disable of Normal Size e Print Document On is selected e Pages per Sheet is not 1 Watermarks Use the Watermarks feature to choose a watermark create your own custom watermarks text only or edit an existing watermark The following watermarks are preset in the driver e e Confidential Draft e SAMPLE 110 Driver features Software Technical Reference The drop down menu shows alphabetically sorted watermarks that are currently available on the system plus the string none which indicates that no watermark is selected This is the default setting Any watermark selected from this list appears in the preview image When First Page Only is selected the watermark is printed only on the first page of the document The First Page Only check box is disabled when the current watermark selection is none Watermarks are applied to logical pages For example when Pages per Sheet is set to 4 and First Page Only is turned off four watermarks appear on the physical page one on each logical page Click Edit and the Watermark Details dialog box appears Watermark Details x Current Watermarks none Confidential Draft SAMPLE New Delete Font
293. tab Advanced tab features The Advanced tab contains controls for the following types of options Paper Output advanced control over the options available on the Page Setup tab Graphic including resolution scaling and TrueType font controls Document Options including printer features and PostScript options Software Technical Reference Driver features 2 HP LaserJet 4200 PS Document Settings ag Paper Output Orientation lt Portrait gt d Paper Source Automatically Select B A Copy Count 1 Copy iu Graphic Resolution lt 600 dpi gt Scaling lt 100 gt B TrueType Font lt Substitute with Device Font gt ie Document Options Envelope Monarch Executive Executive JIS Legal Figure 31 Advanced tab Job Storage tab features The Job Storage tab for the PCL 6 driver for Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP operating systems is shown in the following figure Note Limited Job Storage functions for Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows Me operating systems are available under Printer Features on the PS driver Advanced tab 94 Driver features Software Technical Reference Gera Username Figure 32 Job Storage tab When a hard disk is installed and Job Storage is enabled the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers offer the following PS 3 emulation Job Storage options Off Proof and Hold Private Job The Job Storage tab app
294. tatus page E tite tected E Rr ebbe n ee 31 Configuration 32 COnfiguire BI orm 33 Networking tab 2 iioi i cus bead 34 Configurable Alerts 36 Printer Status and Alerts enne nennen nnns enne 38 Printer Status and Alerts 38 Refreslhirate Option ete t ite reta e nte te erbe p rere P 39 Figure 9 Printer Status and Alert 41 Figure 10 Installation software CD ROM main screen 200400 47 Figure 11 A property page with Bubble Help 54 Figure 12 The default appearance of the Finishing 56 Figure 13 Activating booklet 60 Figure 14 Selecting booklet printing 61 Figure 15 Selecting booklet printing nennen nnne 62 Figure 16 Print Quality 5 nennen 63 Figure 17 Effects tab eiecti etas etd es 65 Figure 18 Preview images Legal on Letter Scale to Fit off left a
295. te DWS value optimizes driver performance Allow scaling from large paper Select Allow Scaling from Large Paper to allow additional larger than supported paper sizes to appear in the Paper tab Size Is drop down list This check box is clear not selected by default Include types in application source list Note 88 When the Include types in application source list check box is selected all paper types such as envelopes and transparencies are available from the Source is list on the Paper tab When you are in an application also called a program you can open the Paper tab by clicking Print from the File menu and then clicking Properties This option is available only when using a computer that is running Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP Driver features Software Technical Reference Fonts The Fonts group box contains a Font DIMM check box and a corresponding Configure button Selecting the Font DIMM check box tells the driver that a Font DIMM is installed and that stored data about the fonts on the DIMM is available When the check box is selected the Configure button is enabled Click the Configure button to open the Configure Font DIMMs dialog box If the Font DIMM check box was not selected when you opened the More Configuration Options dialog box selecting that check box automatically opens the Configure Font DIMMs dialog box Configure Font DIMMs 2 xl Click Add to add a new font DIMM and register
296. ted 40 Software description Software Technical Reference 2 Printer Status and Alerts E Pi xl Options for Alerts For al Printers Y Display the status window when Select an item aA d HP Color hp LaserJet 85 4200 PCL 6 you send a new job to the printer network printers only LaserJet LaserJet 4100PCL amp 4200 PCL 5e your job is finished printing network printers only s printer is low on toner direct connect printers only Cab i printer cannot print 29 2 For network printers notifications are for your jobs only Ua ens Figure 9 Printer Status and Alert options Note The appearance of the screen varies according to the HP LaserJet 4200 or 4300 series printer and its ES configuration Remote firmware update Internal The HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers feature a remote firmware update capability The method for downloading remote firmware updates from the Web site is similar to that used to download the latest printing system software and printer drivers The process for remotely upgrading printer firmware involves three steps 1 Determine the current level of firmware installed on the HP LaserJet 4200 or 4300 2 Go to the Web site and download the latest firmware 3 Download the new firmware to the printer Determining the current level of firmware To determine the current level of firmware view the co
297. ted Private stored jobs are retained in the printer memory after printing but require a PIN to be used each time the private stored jobs are printed Driver features Software Technical Reference Device Settings tab features The Device Settings tab contains controls for paper handling devices and controls for managing the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers To gain access to the Device Settings tab click Start click Settings and then click Printers Right click the printer name click Properties and then click the Device Settings tab hp LaserJet 4200 PS Properties x General Ports Scheduling Sharing Security Device Settings 2 HP LaserJet 4200 PS Device Settings 3 Form To Tray Assignment E Tray 1 Letter Tray 1 Manual Letter E Tray 2 lt Letter gt Envelope Feeder Not Available Tray 3 500 Sheet Not Available Tray 3 1500 Sheet Not Available gt Q Tray 4 500 Sheet Not Available Tray 4 1500 Sheet lt Not Available E Plain Letter Change Tray 1 Setting Envelope Monarch E Executive Executive JIS E Legal Figure 33 Device Settings tab PCL 5e and PCL 6 driver features for Windows 2000 and Windows XP This section describes the options available on each tab of the PCL 6 and PCL 5e driver interfaces Help system The HP LaserJet PCL 6 and PCL 5e drivers inclu
298. tes 26 optional software 50 printer documentation 26 Printer Status and Alerts 37 regional and language versions 122 release notes 27 Index software component localization 125 supporting operating systems 25 private jobs 79 PRN file driver identification support 127 problems See troubleshooting registering 50 registration 161 support 32 Proof and Hold feature 115 ProRes option in drivers 104 configuring 35 viewing information about 35 proxy server 124 bidirectional communication support 127 connectivity support 127 constraints support 129 description 49 document layout features support 129 Driver Management and Configuration DMC support 128 Driver Management and Configuration DMC support 196 features 92 Help feature support 128 installable options support 134 job storage support 130 job stream output support 127 localization support 134 paper source commands 204 PPD files print controls support 130 Printer Status and Alerts support 233 stream output mode support 127 types and sizes of media supported 204 user interface support 128 watermarks support 132 availability by operating system 125 PS fonts supported 139 PS Level 3 Emulation support 92 PScript Driver availability by operating system 124 Quick Copy feature 115 custom 59 defaults 57 description 57 for printing use guide 58 QuickDraw PPD for Mac 124 raster graphics 101 RAW output support 127 and diagnostics 35 Printer Status and Alerts 234 Printer Sta
299. the DIMM fonts with the driver You can also enable or disable specific fonts on a DIMM Add Installed DIMMs Fonts on DIMM HETUVE Ernane tont Cancel Help Figure 28 Configure Font DIMMs dialog box Use the Configure Font DIMMs dialog box to perform the following tasks e Add up to two font DIMMs by clicking the Add button e Specify a unique font DIMM name e Select specific font DIMM data files that contain lists of fonts on specified DIMMs e Select or more installed DIMMs in the Installed DIMM list and based on the selected DIMM s The list to the right Fonts on DIMM shows all of the fonts available on the selected DIMM s e Enable or disable one or more of the selected font s Use the following procedure to configure a font DIMM Make sure that the font DIMM is properly installed Click Add The Add Font DIMM dialog box appears Click Browse The Font DIMM Files dialog box appears Find and select the appropriate Printer Cartridge Metrics PCM file that came with the font DIMM Click Open If you want to specify a Font DIMM Name in the Add Font DIMM dialog box Click OK The selected printer cartridge metrics PCM file appears in the Installed DIMMs list Select the PCM file to see a list of available fonts in the Fonts on DIMM list of WD Software Technical Reference Driver features 89 8 Click OK to close the Add Font DIMM dialog box The fonts on the D
300. the borders of each logical page Page Order There are four options for page order e Right then Down e Down then Right then Down e Down then Left The preview document image changes to reflect alterations in these settings as shown by the examples in the following illustration 11 bv 8 5 8 5 bv 11 inches 11 b 8 5 inches 8 5 bv 11 inches 18 5 bv 11 inches Figure 40 Page Order previews e 2 pages per sheet 4 pages per sheet 6 pages per sheet 9 pages per sheet with Print Page Borders selected 9 pages per sheet with Down then Right page order selected 16 pages per sheet Booklet Layout The Booklet Layout drop down menu visible when the Duplex Unit for 2 Sided Printing setting on the Device Settings tab is Installed offers three choices two of which are based on the current paper size The choices are Off e Left Edge Binding e Right Edge Binding where paper size depends on the paper size set on the Paper tab The following table shows the appropriate entries in the Booklet Printing drop down menu for each selected paper size The Print Document On setting determines the physical media size used in the print job Software Technical Reference Driver features 107 Rotate by 180 degrees This feature causes the driver to rotate all page images 180 degrees The purpose of this feature is to provide more control over the binding edge and for controlling the image on special m
301. tinations Software Technical Reference Engineering Detail 203 Paper tray configurations The HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers come with an integral standard 500 sheet input cassette which is always designated as Tray 2 Up to two optional 500 sheet cassettes can be stacked beneath the printer providing a Tray 3 and a Tray 4 Likewise a 1 500 sheet tray can be added to the standard printer which would then be designated as Tray 3 Another option is to install a 500 sheet cassette with a 1 500 sheet HCI unit beneath in which case the 500 sheet unit would be Tray 3 and the unit would be Tray 4 The cassette hardware provides mechanical system for automatically assigning these tray numbers The following table indicates the paper tray configurations that are possible for the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers Table 89 Paper tray configurations for the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers Note Envelope feeder and or duplexing unit possible any configuration Paper source commands The PCL 5e escape sequence for paper source is Esc amp l H the I is a lowercase L rather than the numeral 1 See the following table for values of For example Esc amp 11H is the command for tray 2 The PCL 6 escape sequence for paper source is ubyte MediaSource See the following table for values of For example ubyte 4 MediaSource is the command for tray 2 Table 90
302. tings and then click Printers Server and clients 2 In the Printers folder double click the Add Printer icon to start the Add Printer Wizard Server only 3 Click Next and then click Local Printer Click Next If your operating system is Windows 95 Windows 98 or Windows Me go to step 6 Server and clients 4 Select the appropriate port in the list of ports or click Add Port to connect to a network port that is not in the list of available ports Server and clients 5 Select the printer model in the list of available printers or click Have Disk if installing the driver from an alternative source such as disk CD ROM or software download If installing from a software download you must know the path where the software has been downloaded Server only 6 After the installation is complete highlight the Printer icon and click File and then p click Properties In the Printer Properties window click the Sharing tab Server only 7 You must enable the File and Print Sharing service for either Microsoft networks or D hovel nemos on me server o e NR Server only 8 To exit Properties click OK A hand appears beneath the Printer icon in the Printers folder indicating that the printer is shared 170 Installing Windows printing system components Software Technical Reference Computerfunctionf 7 Client only 9 You can install the driver using Point and Print in one of the following four ways In Network Neighborhood locate
303. to 0 The entry would like something like this refreshrate HP LaserJet 8150 Series PCL6 0 4 Save the file and exit Notepad The change will take effect for the next print job When the printer was renamed Printer Status and Alerts might Version 1 01 of Printer Status and Printer Status and Alerts did not not update the printer list Alerts typically does not update the detect the changes immediately and you need to name of the printer or even remove shut down Printer Status and the old printer name Alerts and restart it To fix this problem right click the Printer Status and Alerts system tray icon and click Exit Then click the Start Run menu and type in hpstatus to reload status Printer Status and Alerts then picks up the printer changes and shows the renamed printer 242 Engineering Detail Software Technical Reference Solution s Description of Solution s Newly installed printers are not Shut down and restart the system When Printer Status and Alerts first showing up in Printer Status and loads it performs a check of the Alerts system to see if any new printers have been installed If it detects a new printer that it supports it will automatically add the printer to the printer list If the printer was installed then removed and installed again Printer Status and Alerts might not add it automatically and it will have to be added manually To do this complete the following steps 1 Open a command
304. to make the stored job private A private stored job is not the same as a private job see above Private jobs are deleted from the printer memory after they are printed Private stored jobs are retained in the printer memory after printing but require that a PIN be typed each time they are printed Document identifiers used in Job Storage When you use a job storage feature your document is identified at the printer control panel by user name and job name User Name Use the User Name edit box to identify the job at the printer control panel When the driver is first installed or when Factory Defaults Quick Set is selected this string initializes to the empty string but the dialog box detects this condition and replaces the string with your login name in Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP It replaces it with Untitled in Windows 3 1x The following describes the restrictions for the User Name field Job Name 80 Use the Job Name edit box to specify a name to identify the job at the printer control panel When the driver is installed or when the Factory Defaults Quick Set is selected this string is initialized to the empty string but the dialog box detects this condition and replaces the string with Untitled The Job Name and the User Name fields can contain no more than 16 characters each and are limited to A through Z and 0 through 9 because the name appears on the pri
305. to open the default Web HP registration purposes only This browser and connect to the is the fastest and easiest way for product registration page at the you to join our select group of HP http register hp com Web site owners who register to receive Direct to you details about Software Technical Reference Installing Windows printing system components 161 ideas and ways to use your new Click the Electronic Registration HP printer button to open the Welcome to other exciting HP products Hewlett Packard s Registration news about emerging dialog box technologies Click the Exit button to open the Exiting Registration dialog box Technical support updates ee 9 If you have internet access and would like to register using our World Wide Web registration page click here WWW Registration button default option If you do not have internet access or would rather register using e mail please click here to continue with Hewlett Packard s Electronic Registration Electronic Registration button Exit button Welcome to Hewlett Packard s Registration xj D Welcome to HP s electronic registration This information is invent confidential and for HP registration purposes only Please select the country region where you are located Please continue to go to the next screen and begin your registration Exit Previous Figure 69 Welcome to Hewlett Packard s Registration dialog box Table 64 Welcome to Hewle
306. ton Quit button Install button default option Table 83 HP LaserJet Installer dialog text strings custom install Title of dialog box Text in dialog box User Options and Descriptions HP LaserJet Installe Select the install location using the Select Folder option if the desired location is different from Macintosh HD Select available components to install by using the check boxes in the list Click the Read Me button to open the Installer readme file Clicking Install starts the installation on the selected disk Click the Quit button to quit the Installer without making any changes to the system Installation for Macintosh IBM OS 2 and Linux operating systems 189 Installing Items remaining to be installed 286 Installing HP LaserJet XXXX Series This mstallatinn was teated with VSF fear MindVicmn amp aftuw aea Figure 87 Installing dialog box Table 84 Installing dialog text strings Installing Items remaining to be installed conditional This dialog box shows installation number progress No action is required unless you Installing HP LaserJet XXXX Series wish to stop the installation Click the Stop button to interrupt the install file copy Stop button process Installation was successful If you are finished click Quit to leave the Installer If you wish to perform additional installations click Continue Continue 3 oir Figure 88 Insta
307. ts communicates with the printer only during an active print job to minimize network traffic The following restrictions apply to HP products that use Printer Status and Alerts e Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows do not support Printer Status and Alerts with terminal servers e For Device Status printer icons in the status window the computer must have Internet Explorer version 4 72 x or later installed To find the version number open Internet Explorer click Help and then click About Internet Explorer Netscape browsers do not support Printer Status and Alerts No Internet Explorer is necessary for getting status about jobs Internet Explorer can be installed after installing Printer Status and Alerts e Netscape browsers do not support HP Printer Status and Alerts e Ona few programs such as Microsoft Excel and Seagate Crystal Reports multiple copies of the same document show up in the Printer Status and Alerts window as separate jobs This is because these programs actually send each copy as a separate job e For Windows screen reader programs such as Job Access With Speech from Freedom Scientific the computer must have Internet Explorer version 5 0 or later installed To find the version number open Internet Explorer and click Help and then click About Internet Explorer Version 5 0 is reported as Version 5 00 x or later No Internet Explorer is necessary for getting status about jobs for network connected printers Inte
308. tt Packard s Registration dialog box text strings Title of dialog box Text in dialog box User options and descriptions Welcome to Hewlett Packard s Welcome to HP s electronic Click the Previous button to return Registration registration This information is to the Hewlett Packard s confidential and for HP Electronic Registration dialog box registration purposes only 162 Installing Windows printing system components Software Technical Reference Title of dialog box Text in dialog box User options and descriptions Please select the country region Click the Continue button to start a where you are located drop sequence of three screens The down menu first screen provides fields for Please continue to go to the next typing your registration information screen and begin your registration second screen prompts you for information about your HP LaserJet 4200 or 4300 series printer The Continue button third screen gives you the option of Exit button sending the e mail message to register the printer Click the Exit button to open the Exiting Registration dialog box Previous button Hewlett Packard s Electronic Registration X Please complete the following required fields are denoted by blue asterisk X First Name Middle Initial Last Name Company Organization Name Building Mail Stop Dept Mailing Address City Town m Zip Code E mail Address Telephone Number Extension pF DF Occ
309. tus and Alerts 39 regional versions for printing system software 122 registering the product 50 release notes for printing system software 27 releasing stored jobs 81 description 41 determining current firmware level 41 downloading 41 downloading using HP Web JetAdmin 44 printer messages 44 troubleshooting 45 using a local Windows port 42 Index using a Windows network 43 using FTP and a browser 44 using FTP on a direct network connection 43 using TCP IP address and PORT1 43 using UNIX 43 default 63 printer features 20 Resolution Enhancement technology REt 101 resolution options in drivers 104 resolving problems See troubleshooting REt Resolution Enhancement technology 101 rotated orientation 108 Scale Patterns feature 64 Scale to Fit option in drivers 66 screen readable documentation 26 access control 34 Send TrueType as Bitmaps option in drivers 101 serial number for printer 39 Settings tab HP Web Access 32 shading configuring for watermarks 112 silent installer for Windows 168 Size Is option in drivers 72 sizes of media supported 204 sizing documents to fit 66 slots status 39 availability of components by operating system 124 component localization 125 fulfillment information 122 ordering through the Web 122 source commands for paper 204 Source Is options in drivers 103 source options in drivers 87 printer features 20 enabling in driver 87 media types supported 206 sources and destinations 203 enabling in driver 8
310. twork Path dialog box Table 54 Specify Network Path dialog box text strings Title of dialog box Text in dialog box User options and descriptions Specify Network Path Type the network path or the queue If you type a network path or queue name of your printer If you do not know name Next takes you to the Cable Type its name click Browse to view the Selection dialog box available network printers NOTE If you reached this dialog box Network path or queue name from the Connected to Selection dialog Browse button box Next takes you to the Installation Type dialog box Click Browse to bring up a list of devices available on the network Back returns you to the Network Setup dialog box Cancel takes you to the Exit Setup dialog box Set Network Communication Mode l 7 The following TCP IP settings are specified for this printer IP Address 63 230 114 161 J Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 invent Gateway 63 230 114 1 Change Settings Use default port name coos Figure 60 Set Network Communication Mode dialog box Table 55 Set Network Communication Mode dialog box text strings Title of dialog box Text in dialog box User options and descriptions Set Network Communication Select a communication mode for Select a communication mode and Mode this printer type the appropriate address Windows TCP IP recommended information other modes listed After you
311. ue will not advance from the maximum number 9999 to 1 when the up arrow is used or change from 1 to the maximum number 9999 when the down arrow is used When you click another group box or leave the Basics tab invalid entries into the edit box such as non numerical input numbers less than 1 or numbers greater than the maximum allowed are changed to the last valid value that appeared in the box The default number of copies is 1 Because you can set the number of copies you want from some programs conflicts between the program you are using and the driver can arise In most cases the program and the driver communicate so that the number of copies set in one location such as the program will appear in the other such as the driver For some programs this communication does not take place and the copies values are treated independently For these programs setting 10 copies in the program and then setting 10 copies in the driver will result in 100 copies 10 x 10 being printed It is recommended that you set the number of copies in the program wherever possible Software Technical Reference Driver features 83 Orientation Orientation refers to the layout of the image on the page and does not affect the manner in which media is fed into the printer You can specify the orientation of the print job The three available orientations are portrait landscape and rotated The default orientation is Portrait The three orientation options ha
312. ueType TM fonts that are currently installed on the system The Color drop down menu lists the fixed unalterable color choices for the watermark Gray is the only color option for the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers Shading 112 The following range of shades is available from the Shading drop down menu e Lightest e Very Light e Light e Medium Light e Medium e Medium Dark e Dark e Very Dark e Darkest These values represent the intensity of the color selected in the Color attribute Driver features Software Technical Reference Font sizes from 1 to 999 points are available from the Size menu The default point size is language dependent The choice of regular bold italic and bold italic is available from the Style drop down menu Default settings The default settings for new watermarks are Arial R font Gray color Very Light shading 150points and Regular style The default settings for preset watermarks are Arial font Gray color Very Light shading and Bold style The default point size for preset watermarks is language dependent and varies Destination tab features The Destination tab provides options for job storage and output bins The Destination tab is shown in the following illustration gt hp LaserJet 4200 PCL 6 Printing Preferences 2 xi Layout Paper Quality Finishing Effects Destination r Destination Features Job Storage Settings
313. upport Note Fonts can be downloaded to the printer by using the Font Installer feature of the printer driver Albertus CG Times Italic Symbol Albertus Extra Bold Clarendon Condensed Software Technical Reference Installation for Macintosh IBM OS 2 and Linux operating systems 191 192 Times New Roman Antique Olive Coronet Times New Roman Bold Antique Olive Bold Courier Times New Roman Bold Italic Antique Olive Italic Courier Bold Times New Roman Italic Arial Courier Bold Italic Univers Arial Bold Courier Italic Univers Bold Arial Bold Italic Garamond Antiqua Univers Bold Italic Arial Italic Garamond Halbfett Univers Italic CG Omega Garamond Kursiv Univers Condensed CG Omega Bold Garamond Kursiv Halbfett Univers Condensed Bold CG Omega Bold Italic Letter Univers Condensed Bold Italic CG Omega Italic Letter Bold Univers Condensed Medium Italic CG Times Letter Italic Wingdings CG Times Bold Line Printer CG Times Bold Italic Installation for Macintosh IBM OS 2 and Linux operating systems Software Technical Reference e Marigold Changing a printer driver in the printer object Once both the printer object and the printer driver have been installed the correct printer driver should be selected in the print object This might also be necessary if you are using different printer drivers with a single print object To change to a different printer driver 1 Right click the Printe
314. uration Page This page provides information about the configuration for your printer e Supplies Status This page provides information about the print cartridge and the total pages printed and the serial number of the printer e Event Log This page provides information about reported printer errors e Usage Page This page provides information about printer usage e Device Information This page shows device information such as the printer TCP IP address and serial number e Control Panel This page shows the layout of the control panel 30 Software description Software Technical Reference Device status If a printer problem exists status information such as whether the printer is online or the toner is low is available through your Web browser on a computer that is linked directly to the printer You can view this information without physically going to the printer to identify the status The following illustration shows how this information is presented on the printer s Web page h hp LaserJet 4200 638 230 114 161 hp LaserJet 4200 invent ttings N a Device Status Device Status Powersave on 8 Pause Resume Button 9 Continue Other Links Toners remaining hp instant support Black Print Carridge 83 Maintenance Kit 100 HP Part Number Q1338A HP Part Number 110V Q24294 22094 Order Supplies ss o Output Bin 1 Staples OK Supplies Details Input Output Status Size
315. us of a direct connected printer checking for alerts Check for alerts every 60 seconds MoreOftenLessOne 30000 When the Status check rate slider control is set to the MoreOftenLessOne 236 Printer Status and Alerts will use the value for this key to check the status of a direct connected printer checking for alerts Check for alerts every 30 seconds Engineering Detail Software Technical Reference MoreOften 10000 When the Status check rate slider control is set to the MoreOften Printer Status and Alerts will use the value for this key to check the status of a direct connected printer checking for alerts Check for alerts every 10 seconds values are default values EWSConnect This section controls the timeout value for attempting to connect to the embedded Web server EWS within the printer If the printer does not respond within the following timeout value specified Printer Status and Alerts will assume that the EWS is not present within the printer Table 102 EWSConnect section EWSTimeout 4000 Timeout value for retrieving data from the EWS within the printer The time specified is in milliseconds 4000 milliseconds 4 seconds LostJobTimer This section controls the default amount of time that Printer Status and Alerts will continue to track a print job without any change in the job state When Printer Status and Alerts starts tracking a new print job it sets up a timer for the follo
316. utomatic nnne enne 90 Prnterinage s scat e ettet te ttu ve d teo tcc ree oec 90 INT Eorms tab featUres 34 ex e te ERE CURE HR IRR ERR ED Pee cea ag aes Peg EHE E etes eR DRAN 91 Configuring the trayss 2 22 tz d cdi e wil degen ntl agate 91 PS driver features for Windows 95 98 Me and 4 0 040 4 6 80000000 0 92 PS Level 3 Emulation support for the HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers 92 Page Setup tab features uote eec piter e ted i eie res ec alere 92 Advanced tab 93 Job Storage tab 0 2111 0 0000 ener seen nnns s sen trennen nnns 94 Gu AD eer 95 Proof and a o o EE 95 Private Job and Stored deeds erect ra d ere lote deer dne v n ree 95 oe ied ai tes 96 MILF e aae EI e eA E EE EER EN EREE EEEE E EAEEREN ETETE 96 Stored SOD tet etate E 96 Device Settings tab features essssssssssssssssssseesesen ener ener nenne nnns nennt nne 97 PCL and PCL 6 driver features for Windows 2000 and Windows 97 System ER 97 What s this ide ain
317. vate 96 private 115 proof and hold 79 releasing stored 81 releasing stored 117 stored 79 stored 80 stored 96 stored 116 landscape orientation in drivers 59 landscape orientation option in drivers 92 language versions for printing system software 122 driver support 134 key to abbreviations 126 localization of software components 125 LaserJet Utility See HP LaserJet Utility Layout tab in drivers 98 links to off printer solutions 32 availability of drivers 50 availability of software components 124 printer support Web site 173 Printing Architecture 124 System requirements 173 driver support 134 software components 125 Mac QuickDraw PPD 124 availability of software components 124 bidirectional communication support 27 changes made by installation 179 ColorSync profiles 174 driver versions 49 fonts supported 175 HP LaserJet Utility 174 installation notes 174 installing printer software for Mac OS 178 online help 174 PDEs 174 PPDs 174 printing system software components 50 setting up AppleTalk networked printers with Mac OS 8 6 to 9 1 179 setting up printers with Mac OS X 179 setting up USB direct printer connection with Mac OS 8 6 to 9 1 178 supporting the printing system software 25 System requirements 173 uninstalling printer software 179 installers 124 manuals See documentation media 203 types and sizes supported 204 information about total 86 information about total installed 88 installable options support 120 installable
318. ve these configurations e Portrait The top edge of the document is the shorter edge of the paper e Landscape The top edge of the document is the longer edge of the paper e Rotate by 180 degrees This creates a landscape or portrait orientation in which the image is rotated 180 degrees This setting is useful for printing envelopes and when using some third party paper handling devices You can can toggle orientation between portrait and landscape by left clicking the preview image If you select the Rotate by 180 degrees check box there is no change in the preview image About By clicking the About button on the Basics tab or clicking the HP logo on any of the driver property pages the About box appears To close the About box click OK press ESC press ALT or press ENTER The following figure shows the About box The information it contains varies according to HP LaserJet model number driver date and versions About This Driver HP LaserJet 4200 PELE Driver Version 4 18 4200 401 DEK 2 0 Copyright 1996 2002 Hewlett Packard Co All Rights Reserved Driver Extensions invent Figure 26 About This Driver dialog box Driver extensions The Driver Extensions text box provides you with some information about any extended driver functionality It can contain a brief description of the driver extension and a version number 84 Driver features Software Technical Reference Configure tab features
319. wercase character it automatically shifts to uppercase If you try to enter a character with an ASCII code of less than 32 or greater than 126 characters the character is removed from the edit field along with all characters that follow it If you try to enter more than 16 characters any character beyond 16 is truncated When the dialog box is closed or the edit box loses focus an empty string is replaced with Untitled In those languages for which Untitled cannot be translated without the use of invalid characters the driver uses a string of three dashes The acceptable characters for job name and user name vary for each operating system The string must be displayable on the printer control panel Using Job Storage options when printing Note 116 You can use Job Storage options in the Destination tab of the printer driver The printer driver installed on your computer must be configured to use the Job Storage features See the Configuring the printer driver for a printer hard disk section 1 Click Print from the software program The Print dialog box appears 2 Click Properties The Properties dialog box appears Driver features Software Technical Reference 3 4 5 6 Click the Destination tab to display the destination options Click Job Storage on the drop down menu under Destination Features Click Settings The Job Storage Settings dialog box appears You can then select one of the Job Storage options described
320. windows system for Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP systems it will be winnt system32 3 Make sure Printer Status and Alerts is closed If it is not right click the Printer Status and Alerts tray icon and choose Exit After choosing Exit make sure you select the No don t start automatically option Make sure that all other programs are closed Type the command hpbdrvhk u a Type the command hpbdrvhk c a Restart the system ON DOO A If printing does not continue after restarting see Printer Status and Alerts is causing problems with a specific driver model 246 Engineering Detail Software Technical Reference Index of Normal Size option in drivers 109 1 500 sheet tray See trays 500 sheet tray See trays About tab in drivers 118 access control security 34 accessibility support in drivers 128 enabling 86 supported by Driver Autoconfiguration 29 Accessory Output Bin option in drivers 119 accounting information support 127 Acobat Reader See Adobe Acrobat Reader ADA Americans with Disabilities Act compliance 26 PS level 3 printer drivers and fonts 92 Web site 92 availability by operating system 124 presence on CD ROM 26 Adobe PS Level 3 Emulation support 92 Advanced tab in drivers 93 configuring for Printer Status and Alerts 234 configuring in HP Web Access 36 configuring update interval for direct connect printers 236 configuring update interval for queries 235 configuring update interval for spool
321. wing specified value Whenever the state of the print job changes the timer is reset If the state of print job does not change within the time specified Printer Status and Alerts will give up trying to track the print job and set the job state as Unknown Table 103 LostJob Timer section LostJobimeout 300000 Timeout value for indicating that the state of the job is unknown and Printer Status and Alerts will no longer try to track the job if the job state hasn t been updated within the time specified Time specified is in milliseconds 300000 milliseconds 5 minutes 300000 1000 milliseconds 60 seconds biditimeout This section controls the bidirectional connection timeout values when attempting to open a connection to a printer It also controls the timeout values for getting information from the device as well as how long to wait before trying again Table 104 biditimeout section Timeout1 3000 Timeout value to wait before retrying the failed bidi call before trying the call again On a failed call it will retry retry1 number of times before it completely fails Time specified is in milliseconds Timeout2 3000 Timeout value to wait until repeating the first retry loop After the retry1 loop has completed without response it will retry retry2 number of times before it completely fails Time specified is in milliseconds Number of times to retry a bidi call in the event of a failure waiting timeout1 milliseconds
322. with the printer If the device is working properly and Printer Status and Alerts still cannot communicate with it then Printer Status and Alerts will not support the device 1 Open a command prompt window 2 Change directories so that the current directory is the windows system directory For Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows Me Systems it will typically be windows system for Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP systems it will be winntisystem32 Software Technical Reference Solution s Description of Solution s 3 Make sure Printer Status and Alerts is closed If it is not right click the Printer Status and Alerts tray icon and click Exit 4 Make sure that all other programs are closed 5 Type the command hpbdrvhk u of the Printer Goes 2 If the device status works The printer driver might be correctly from solution 1 then incompatible with the Printer Status the problem is most likely and Alerts proxy drivers so it because of an unsupported should be disabled or removed printer driver model Follow these steps 1 Open a command prompt window 2 Change directories so that the current directory is the windows system directory For Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows Me systems it will typically be windows system for Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP systems it will be winntisystem32 3 Make sure Printer Status and Alerts is closed If it is n
323. x Click Next in this and subsequent dialog boxes that appear In this example a bindery queue with the name Test Queue was created on the server 222 Engineering Detail Software Technical Reference Building an NDS queue Building an NDS queue requires a procedure that differs only slightly from building a bindery queue Follow the instructions for a creating a bindery queue until the window in the following illustration appears Je E Software Technical Reference Engineering Detail 223 Figure 104 NetWare dialog box beginning NDS queue Instead of leaving the NDS Tree Name Tree for the device to use field unconfigured click the drop down menu and select a Novell tree The correct corresponding server context appears You can manually change the content if it is not correct Click the Operating Mode icon in the left window for the mode you want to use Then click the Queues icon on the left pane see the following illustration NetWare Hefw are Directory Services 224 Engineering Detail Software Technical Reference Figure 105 NetWare dialog box queues serviced Click Change This screen shown in the following illustration differs slightly from the bindery version of the same window In this window a tree structure appears on the left side indicating the Novell Tree Click the icon Software Technical Reference Engineering Detail 225 Figure 106 Queues dialog box NDS queue T
324. x User Options and Descriptions Installing Items remaining to be installed conditional Click the Stop button to interrupt the install number file copy process Stop button iit ta leave the Irstaller If you with ro perform additional instaltatians click Continue Installation was cuccessful If you are finished click Figure 83 Installation was successful dialog box 186 Installation for Macintosh IBM OS 2 and Linux operating systems Software Technical Reference Table 80 Installation was successful dialog text strings itle of dialog bo Text in dialog box User Options and Descriptions Installation was successful If you are Click the Quit button to exit the Installer finished click Quit to leave the Installer Click the Continue button to return to the If you want to perform additional HP LaserJet Screen Fonts installer installations click Continue Macintosh Macintosh OS installation This section provides information about the various installation dialog box sequences for the Macintosh operating system Main Install dialog box sequence This section provides information about the Macintosh installation dialog box sequence for the Easy Install the typical installation option hp LaserJet for Macintosh This installation was created with Installer VISE from Mind ision Software Figure 84 HP LaserJet for Macintosh installer splash screen dialog box Table 81 HP LaserJet for Mac
325. xamples of settings affected in this way are tray types default symbol sets and Web access alerts The elapsed time for an update depends on the I O transfer time as well as the time that it takes for the printer to reinitialize The I O transfer time depends on a number of things including the speed of the host computer sending the update the I O method Fast InfraRed Connect FIR parallel or network The reinitialization time will depend on the specific hardware configuration of the printer such as the number of EIO devices installed the presence of external paper handling devices and the amount of memory installed If the remote firmware update process is interrupted before the firmware is downloaded while RECEIVING UPGRADE appears on the control panel display the firmware file must be resent If power is lost during the flash DIMM update while UPGRADING PRINTER appears on the control panel display the update is interrupted and the message RESEND UPGRADE appears in English only on the control panel display The update must now be sent only by a computer that is attached to the parallel port of the printer Finally any print jobs ahead of the RFU job in the queue will be printed before the update is processed The printer automatically power cycles after processing the update Use one of the following methods to update your printer Remote firmware update through a local Windows port Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows Me
326. y 8 Under Select Events click Media Path 9 Selectthe List1 check box next to CLOSE DRAWERS DOORS COVERS 10 Click Apply A screen stating that your selections have been accepted should appear Click OK 11 In the SMTP Server field under Outgoing Mail type the TCP IP address for the SMTP server for example 192 168 0 201 12 In the Domain Name field under Outgoing Mail type the domain name 13 Click Apply 14 Click Security 15 Under Security select the Outgoing Mail check box 16 Click Apply 17 Totest the configuration open the top cover of the printer then go to your computer and verify that you have received an e mail message from the printer Euro character The euro is the name for the currency of the European Union EU Use of this unit was launched on January 1 1999 The euro has changed the way business is conducted in Europe and has affected every company and industry in the world It is vital that companies understand and prepare for the changes the euro brings This HP LaserJet 4200 and 4300 series printers include euro characters for each of the internal fonts The printer can print the euro character in the Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP operating systems Hewlett Packard is committed to maximizing document portability through supporting and promoting euro symbol standards 46 Software description Software Technical Reference Printing system components P
327. y 8 3 inches and less than or equal to 312 mm by 470 mm 12 3 inches by 18 5 inches When Paper Size is set to Letter Legal or A4 clicking Print on Both Sides makes the Flip Pages Up and Booklet Printing options available The default for both of these options is OFF Flip Pages Up The Flip Pages Up check box enabled only when Print on Both Sides is selected is used to specify the duplex binding option The following table demonstrates the results of selecting this box depending on the paper orientation selected on the Basics tab Table 10 Page orientation Orientation Basics tab Flip Pages Up selected Flip Pages Up not selected Portrait Short edge binding Long edge binding Landscape Long edge binding Short edge binding When Print on Both Sides is selected the document preview image changes to show a spiral binding along either the left or the top edge of the page In addition a folded over corner appears in the lower right portion of the preview image indicating that printing will occur on the back side An arrow on the folded over corner points in the direction that the pages would be flipped if they were bound together Booklet Printing The Booklet Printing drop down menu visible when Print on Both Sides is selected offers eight choices two of which are based on the current paper size The list contains the items such as the following examples e Off e paper size Left Binding e paper size Right Binding
328. y the printing installation during a Custom Installation Description of HPSTATUS INI entries and their purpose The following is a description of each section that HPSTATUS INI can have and the possible keys that each section contains as well as a description of the purpose for each key allprinters As is implied by the section name the keys in this section are for every printer installed unless there is a printer specific section which has independent alert settings An error alert is one that will stop the printer from printing A warning alert is a less serious alert that does not stop the printer from printing Table 97 allprinters section KeyName Values 7 dc NU Printer Status and Alerts will notactivate display itself when a new job is detected Printer Status and Alerts will activate display itself when a new job is detected finishedjobalert 0 Printer Status Alerts will notactivate display itself when a print job has completed includes finished or unknown 1 Printer Status and Alerts will activate display itself when a job has completed fneudesimehedoruknon or S2 wnan a10 nas compan warningalert 0 Printer Status and Alerts will notactivate display itself when a warning is nem 1 Printer Status and Alerts will activate display itself when a warning is active lowtoneralert Printer Status and Alerts will notactivate display itself when low toner has been dete
329. you type another value into the box for example 3 the control will round the value entered to the nearest valid value in this example 4 Related controls indented beneath the Pages per Sheet edit box are Print Page Borders and Page Order which become active when Pages Per Sheet is greater than 1 Print Page Borders sets a line around each page image on a printed sheet to help visually define the borders of each logical page The Page Order drop down menu contains four selections Right then Down Down then Right Left then Down Down then Left The preview document image changes to reflect alterations in these settings as shown by the examples in the following illustration 8 5 bv 11 inchesl 18 5 bv 11 inches Figure 15 Selecting booklet printing type Page order preview images 2 pages per sheet 4 pages per sheet 6 pages per sheet 9 pages per sheet with Print Page Borders selected 9 pages per sheet with Down then Right page order selected 16 pages per sheet Driver features Software Technical Reference Print Quality The HP LaserJet printer driver Print Quality group box provides options that control resolution graphics settings and font settings The Print Quality group box also includes a Details button Clicking this button opens the dialog box The Print Quality Details dialog box provides options for various print quality settings as shown in the following illustration
330. ype the queue name you want to use see the following illustration verify that the file server and context are correct and then click OK The remaining process is the same as shown in the figure entitled Create Queue dialog box x Queue Name TEST QUEUE Bueue Information File Server SO AUR T Context Browse Add everyone to list of users _ Figure 107 Create Queue dialog box NDS queue Note Occasionally you will be asked to provide a community name The usual default community name is Public Removing printer objects from the Novell server Internal Note A bindery queue for a Novell server consists of two objects the print queue object and the print server object An NDS queue consists of three objects the print queue object the print object and the print server object 1 Find and open the NWADMIN32 program If ZENworks has been installed on the server you can browse to NWADMIN32 through the following path NETWORK NEIGHBORHOOD gt SERVER SPY 5XB gt SYS gt PUBLIC gt WIN32 gt NWADMIN32 EXE indicated by a red icon 2 Open NWADMIN32 If you are not logged in to the specific server where the file is installed you might need authentication for that server 226 Engineering Detail Software Technical Reference rm eU are RCH 1ne RCH IC2 PO amp M In Ine E DEONAR 1 q A ACH IneH 1 1 DemDEID Ine A D Ine RCH Ine

HP LaserJet 4200/4300 Software Technical Reference

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents